Home

620 Product Manua

1. M8 STUD SET 2X NUTS PLAIN WASHER 80 5 0 _ NYLON BUSH Pa i 35 m m 8 STUD SET FIXING 1 CIRS FIXING CTRS ms 4 HOLES 8 CLEARANCE LINE on ae E 12 1 MP d DOUBLE KEYHOLE 1 A TYP IN 4 POSNS 9 B B B oOo ve DDL 000 700 oO He 00600 DRIVE UNII 584s 620 5 5 e gt lt 5 3 n a Oo E 212 153 20mm MIN LOAD PLAN VIEW FILTER MAYBE MOUNTED IN EITHER OREINTATION FLAT OR ON SIDE MOUNT IN IP54 BOX FOR WALL MOUNTING FILTER MOUNTING DETAILS Part No C0464055U200 FOR 584s 620 Type 7 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 21 The type 6 and 7 620 filters not of the footprint mounting design These filters may be mounted to the left right above below or spaced behind the product but can be mounted in two orientations i flat against the wall or ii projecting over from the wall mounting arrangements are shown in figures 3 9 and 3 10 Wallmount applications require the EMC filter to be mounted in a separate suitable enclosure and the gland box to be fitted to the 620 The EMC filter should be mounted as close to the 620 drive module as possible The connection between the 620 and filter must always be as short as possib
2. ACK ALARM 166 EMOTE SEQ SEQ 786 BIT 8 is forced TRUE Remote Delay 790 Ack Alarm JOG MODE 80 gt H Jog Mode REMOTE SEQ 786 3 REMOTE SEQ 786 8 Remote Trip 789 Delay before trip becomes Status of the Remote trip alarm OK Warning Remote active after bit being cleared Seq Bit 9 FALSE and delay not expired Active Trip JOG SPEED 1 75 JOG SPEED 2 76 1 MODE 80 JOG ACCEL RATE 113 JOG DECEL RATE 114 active timer expired and remote not inhibited 10 00 10 00 5 FALSE 10 0 SECS 10 0 SECS 620 Vector Drive HA463584 PARAMETERS JOG SPEED 1 JOG SPEED 2 MODE JOG ACCEL RATE JOG DECEL RATE NOTE RAISE LOWER RAMP Function Blocks 5 9 Drive setpoint during Jog if Mode FALSE Drive setpoint during Jog if Mode TRUE Selects Jog Speed to be used Acceleration rate used by Jog Deceleration rate used by Jog The ACCEL DECEL rates and the setpoints apply to both local and normal operating modes MMI ENTRIES deans RAISE LOWER RESET VALUE 82 0 00 Pas ym RAMP RATE 83 60 0 SECS Piae RAISE INPUT 85 FALSE LOWER INPUT 86 FALSE MIN VALUE 87 100 00 MAX VALUE 88 100 00 adie ewes EXTERNAL RESET 89 FALSE RAISE LOWER 45 0 00 RAISE LOWER INIT 678 0 00
3. OFFSET TRIM OFFSET SCALE OFFSET 1 OFFSET 2 PERIOD G TESTMODE Enable TEST MODE Figure 5 3 Phase Loop 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 2 6 Function Blocks PHASE RESET POS CALC ENABLE POSITION ERROR SATURATED OVERFLOW MAX POSITION ERR OFFSET MENU OFFSET OFFSET SCALE OFFSET TRIM TEST MODE ENABLE OFFSET 1 OFFSET 2 PERIOD INPUT SCALING REF SCALE A REF SCALE B FBK SCALE A FBK SCALE B Sets and holds the position error at zero Enable the computation of position error disabling this also zeros the position error Clamped Error output This is the primary output of the phase loop function block Position error is not usually used directly but instead connected to the PID input first disconnecting the PID error calculator The PID is then used either directly or more commonly as a speed correction Position Error output has been clamped Error information is still valid until the OVERFLOW flag is set It is not uncommon for this flag to be set during rapid accelerations where torque limit is reached For optimal operation torque limit must never reached Position Error has overflowed and phase information has been lost This is because the error has exceeded 1 000 000 000 counts about 120 000 revolutions with a 2048 line encoder Limit clamp for position error Fixed offset scaled by OFFS
4. H1 Figure 2 6 Full wiring diagram for 620 series drives 620 Vector Drive HA463584 2 z Pre Instollotion Planning Differences between Drives Each of the drive variants requires different rating breakers for MCB1 The requirements are shown in Table 2 1 Entries with N A indicate that the drive rating is not available for that type at that voltage MCB2 should be rated according to the full load current of the motor Table 2 1 MCB requirements 208 240v 380 460v 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Pre Installation Planning 2 7 TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS Terminals are provided for both the control and power connections to allow reliable connections with external devices and power supplies The function of these terminals is described in tables 2 2 to 2 7 Control Board Terminals The control board terminals are identical for all variants of the 620 Vector Drive The layout of the control board terminals is given in Figure 2 8 and the functions are described in Table 2 5 See Chapter 1 ELECTRICAL RATINGS for control terminal specification mm n e P1 Link Encoder Digital Analogu P3 RS485 RS232 Figure 2 7 Control Board Terminals Front Back Lower Upper a N A Transmit RS 485 Serial Port 2 N A Transmit E 3 jJ N A Transmit Receive 4 N A Transmit Receive Link Fibre Optics Red Transmit Primary 620L only Black
5. INPUTS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS SYSTEM CONFIGURE ANALOG INPUTS SETUP PARAMETERS HOME INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS OUTPUT SETUP PARAMETERS HOMING DISTANCE SETUP PARAMETERS HOME FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS 1 ENCODER SCALE CONFIGURE DRIVE POLES SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS Id PROP SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS Id INT SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS MAX Id SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS Id SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS MAX Id SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS MIN Id SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS Iq INT SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS MAX Iq SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY Id Iq LOOPS MIN Iq SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS BRAKE THRESHOLD 934 5 5 USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS MODN INDEX SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS THRESHOLD 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 1 5 Text Defau SYSTEM RESERVED MISCELLANEOUS AD NEG THRESHOLD 6 SYSTEM RESERVED Iq LOOPS MAX Id HI word SYSTEM RESERVED Iq LOOPS MIN Id HI word SYSTEM RESERVED
6. STALL DELAY 137 STALL TRIP 20 0 OVER SPD INHIBIT 1 SPEED LEVEL 1 hs used UNDER V LEVEL 685 Diino ete sete UNDER VOLTS 686 vow eer 5703 RCV INHIBIT 1 SPD FBK DELAY 687 SPD FBK THRESHD 68 SPD FBK INHIBIT 68 HEALTH INHIBIT 219 OPERATING MODE 25 DRIVE START 23 DRIVE ENABLE 24 5 READY 559 FALSE Bigeye RUN 28 FALSE ERES HEALTH STORE 203 i PE HEALTH WORD 217 fuus FIRST ALARM 218 HEALTHY 27 TRUE u xau HEALTH OUTPUT 12 CALIBRATION ENCODER LINES 131 IUE ENCODER SUPPLY 774 620 FALSE FALSE 1 00 REMOTE TRIP 789 OK 1 75 00 1 50 00 46 FALSE 1 17 00 RUE FALSE 95 00 5 4 00 5 10 00 K 45 FALSE 39 120 00 440 VOLTS TRUE 42 FALSE 10 000 SECS 8 10 00 91 FALSE 0x0000 STOPPED FALSE FALSE 0x0000 0x0010 0x0010 TRUE lt 2048 r 50 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 5 MAX SPEED RPM 130 1500 RPM eO 0 193 1 0000 FREQUENCY 448 50 0 Hz v DIVIDER 1 194 1 0000 euam MOTOR VOLTS 486 415 VOLTS e 195 100 00 ABS MOTOR RATING RMS 134 1 0 AMPS eO INPUT 0 196 0 00 lt 1 NO OF POLES 399 4
7. TIME LIMIT 643 30 000 SECS SATURATED 610 FALSE PWR LOSS ACTIVE 766 FALSE OVERFLOW 611 FALSE SPEED SETPOINTS f POSITION ERROR 338 0 SPT1 171 0 00 SCALING 45524 4 DIRECT RATIO 172 0 1000 f FBK SCALE 498 10000 mr E DIRECT SPT MAX 173 100 00 5 499 10000 dys 34375 Brevis DIRECT SPT MIN 174 100 00 5 h FBK ENCODER 77 0 DIRECT ENABLE 175 FALSE f LENGTH MENU SPD SPT 176 0 00 346 fu LENGTH 765 0 MAX SPEED 177 100 00 f LENGTH SCALE 762 1 was Boom anqas MIN SPEED 178 100 00 5 f LENGTH RATE 764 100 0 SEQ RUN INPUT 49 0 00 SUBTRACT LENGTH 763 FALSE Ds 9 SEQ OUTPUT 50 0 00 INCH MENU T ZERO SPEED Eit otis INCH ADVANCE 604 FALSE ZERO SPD HYST 132 0 10 Ta INCH RETARD 605 FALSE NUMEN dS ZERO SPEED LEVEL 252 0 50 f INCH RATE 606 10 0 ies des AT ZERO SPEED 17 TRUE f CALC REF POSTION DOPO AT ZERO SETPOINT 18 TRUE f ENABLE 659 FALSE E MA AT STANDSTILL 19 TRUE INPUT 660 0 00 fca o TEST MODE OUTPUT 661 0 y ENABLE 647 FALSE T ao geras SPEED SETPOINT 1 648 5 00 E lans the INPUT 545 0 00 556 q s
8. 702 E 62 OUTPUT 703 0 00 s VALUE OPERATOR 3 fig 9g INPUT A 706 0 00 Eu kusa INPUT B 707 0 00 f us Sa a INPUT C 708 0 00 fue TYPE 709 IF C fas dete OUTPUT 710 0 00 VALUE OPERATOR 4 hs INPUT A 713 0 00 INPUT 714 0 00 fills INPUT C 715 0 00 filie be TYPE 716 IF C A f x OUTPUT 717 0 00 If inputs and outputs are time values divide the time in seconds by a factor of ten i e 11 3 seconds 1 13 Conversely outputs are multiplied by a factor of ten to obtain their value in seconds Boolean inputs or outputs are FALSE if zero and TRUE if non zero 620 Vector Drive HA463584 PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C TYPE Enumerated Value 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N m Lm AO OVL tA t OUTPUT Function Blocks 5 37 General purpose input General purpose input General purpose input The operation to be performed on the three inputs to produce the output value Type IF C A ABS A B C SWITCH A B lt lt gt gt gt gt 1 IF C HOLD BINARY DECODE ON DELAY OFF DELAY TIMER MINIMUM PULSE PULSE TRAIN WINDOW UP DWN COUNTER Range XXX XX The result of performing the sel
9. PILOT 590 MODE 777 FALSE STOP ZERO SPEED 126 1 00 bo ue PROG STOP I LIM 622 150 00 COAST STOP 26 FALSE eter PROGRAM STOP 22 FALSE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 STOP HIERARCHY Coast Stop Function Blocks 5 1 e Disables the drive and opens the output contactor via the pilot output Enable e Suspends And Resets The Control Loops Fast Stop e Independent Ramp Time e Timer e Independent Zero Speed Normal Run Stop Independent Ramp Time PARAMETERS RUN STOP TIME RUN STOP LIMIT FAST STOP TIME FAST STOP LIMIT USE SYSTEM RAMP PRE START DELAY READY DELAY CONTACTOR DELAY PILOT 590 MODE STOP ZERO SPEED PROG STOP I LIM COAST STOP PROGRAM STOP Ramp Input 70 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Sets deceleration rate for the Stop ramp operation Sets the maximum time the drive will allow the Stop function to operate if the drive has not reached zero speed in this period the drive will coast to a stop If USE SYSTEM RAMP TRUE then timer is started once the o p of the system ramp of local ramp reaches zero Sets deceleration rate for the Fast Stop ramp operation Sets the maximum time the drive will allow the Fast Stop function to operate if the drive has not reached zero speed in this period the drive will coast to a stop Forces the drive to quench the input to the system ramp local ramp and wait for the ramp output to reach
10. EUROTHERM DRIVES 620 Standard 620 Com 620 Link Product Manual HA463584 Issue 5 Compatible with Version 4 x Software Copyright Eurotherm Drives Limited 1999 All rights strictly reserved No part of this document may be stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means to persons not employed by a Eurotherm group company without written permission from Eurotherm Drives Ltd Although every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of this document it may be necessary without notice to make amendments or correct omissions Eurotherm Drives cannot accept responsibility for damage injury or expenses resulting therefrom WARRANTY Eurotherm Drives warrants the goods against defects in design materials and workmanship for the period of 12 months from the date of delivery on the terms detailed in Eurotherm Drives Standard Conditions of Sale 1 058393 Eurotherm Drives reserves the right to change the content and product specification without notice INTENDED USERS This manual is to be made available to all persons who are required to configure install or service the equipment described herein or any other associated operation Cont 2 Safety Information wi Warning Only qualified personnel who thoroughly understand the operation of this equipment and any associated machinery should install start up or attempt maintenance of this equipment Non compliance with this warning ma
11. RAMP HOLD 7 J inked to 281 SPECIAL Default Value Tag is connected to tag 281 f Tag is only visible if FULL MENUS TRUE h Tag is only visible with special PASSWORD Figure 5 1 Set up Parameter entry These tag numbers may be used to reconfigure the block diagram if the default configuration shown in figure 2 17 does not provide the functionality required Reconfiguring is done using source tags destination tags internal links Analogue and digital inputs have destination tags See section Configure I O on page 5 45 An analogue or digital input may be connected to a function block input by setting its destination tag equal to the tag number of the block input as required Analogue and digital outputs have source tags See section Configure I O on page 5 45 A function block output may be connected to an analogue or digital output by setting the analogue or digital output source tag equal to the tag number of the block output as required Function blocks have destination tags A function block output may be connected to the input of another function block by setting its destination tag equal to the tag number of the block input or analogue digital output as required Function blocks do not have source tags A function block output may therefore be routed to any variable but only parameters which have a destination tag can be connected to its inputs 620 Vector D
12. ua ee ee Sr an 3 5 Model 620 Type 4 5 3 5 Model 620 6 and 7 3 8 Control WNG eee te eee rrr 3 9 D Du uu 3 9 Introduction 3 9 Brake Resistor Selection kaS 3 10 Brake Resistor Specificotion 3 11 Specification of the Dynamic Braking Switch 3 12 Cont 8 Contents Contents Page 8 9 and 10 Brake Unit Rating 3 13 Brake Resistor Selection Further notes 3 13 Calculating Power 3 13 Series parallel 3 15 Resistor Voltage 3 15 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES enm 3 16 Introductionis rtr 3 16 EMC Filters to Reduce Line Conducted Noise 3 16 Interaction With Earth fault Monitoring Systems and Safety Considerations sse 3 22 Minimising Radiated Emissions 3 22 Screening and Earthing When Mounted in an Enclosure 3 23 Screening and Earthing When Wall Mounted 3
13. 5 OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS 0PERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS 0PERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS 0PERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS 5 0PERATORS OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR FALSE FALSE NAND OR EDGE 1 0 ED E C OR A B FLOP FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE AND NAND A B C OR NOR A B C XOR A B EDGE 1 0 EDGE A AND C FLOP FALSE FALSE TR FALSE TR FALSE TR NOT A AND A NAND A B C OR NOR A B C EDGE 1 0 ED E AND A B C OR A B FLOP FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE NOT A AND A NAND A B C
14. A programmable delay between receiving and outputting a Boolean TRUE signal INPUT A becoming TRUE starts the delay timer INPUT B sets the duration of the delay At the end of the duration OUTPUT becomes TRUE unless INPUT A has reverted to FALSE Setting INPUT C to TRUE 20 inverts the output input C FALSE input C TRUE i ti 4 Target time input A programmable delay between receiving and outputting a Boolean FALSE signal INPUT A becoming FALSE starts the delay timer INPUT B sets the duration of the delay Setting INPUT C to TRUE 0 inverts the output At the end of the duration OUTPUT becomes FALSE unless INPUT A has reverted to TRUE 5 40 Function Blocks Operation TIMER MINIMUM PULSE PULSE TRAIN Description input A input B 1 1 4 T 1 Times the period elapsed from when INPUT is set TRUE and held TRUE to when INPUT B becomes TRUE OUTPUT is the duration of the timer starting from zero If INPUT B is TRUE the value for OUTPUT is held until INPUT 15 released If on release INPUT A is still TRUE the timer will continue from the held value Setting INPUT A and INPUT B to FALSE resets the timer INPUT C is not used input C FALSE input C TRUE Duration input B Creates an output pulse of adjustable minimum time when INPUT A is TRUE INPUT A is assumed to be a sequence of TRUE pulses and FALSE off periods INPUT B
15. ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK 620 Vector Drive HA463584 INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGR
16. Pe Cas gt __ IN aa cx dius igs raststop es 22 u eos JOG mi AUX DISABLE Se ENABLE gt gt CX coast stor Cas 2 Moe PEG esa Sar sree nie Coss RAMP mo M ENGINE 123 securo 2 JOG DECEL RATE Gia RATE Ancora _ JOG ACCEL RATE 7113 R Sa S RUN STOP TIME 320 gt START 97 gt Css gt Fi CONTACTOR DELAY 1127 TNR jiu BUTTON e ZERO SPEED Loca start SPEED sumon FEEDBACK ak LOCAL STOP ATZERO STANDSTILL Buron MT eus SETPOINT 19 N gt n La eae Buron 098 EXTERNAL TRIP 3oGuobE SPEED OTHER ALARMS CS Jo81 GEO Co SETPOINT S TOTAL SPD DMD eon a yoa2 w po GD Ge Giz aD STOP LOCAL RAISE MIN SPEED RAMP BUTTON LOCAL SETPOINT LOCAL LOWER RAISELOWER ON SPEED SETPOINT C LOCALDIRECTON 773 Buron 3 DIRECT DIRECT VP RATION ENABLE MAK re Ri DIRECT SETPOINT RQ I SPEED aD SETPOINT DIRECT UP MIN F5 TORQUE DEMAND 5705 OUTPUT 453 MAG CURRENT 5703 5708 MAIN SPD SETPT Rx SPTSCALE SPTSIGN TORO DID DEMAND 1 S SETPOINT SUM 2 I ISOLATE Can p C8D uw urs TORQUE 7 ES 92 Vae motor 3301 INPUT2 lt CONTROLLER Cara lt ea a gt INPUTS MUX lt 373
17. Receive Primary Feedback Encoder Reference Encoder 620Com amp 620L only A A A A B B B B A Z Z D Z Z Power 15v Power 15v Ov Ov GND GND Digital Aux Digital 1 Thermistor Ov Ov Thermistor Digital I P 1 Pilot Health Digital 2 Coast Stop Digital I P 3 B Fast Stop Digital 4 E Jog Digital O P 1 Start Digital O P 2 Enable Digital O P 3 24v 24v Analogue I O Aux Analogue I O GND Ov Ov Analogue 3 Ramp 1 Analogue 4 Direct 2 Analogue 5 F Analogue O P 1 Analogue O P 2 10v 10v Figure 2 8 620 Terminal Layout 620 Vector Drive HA463584 2 8 Pre Installation Planning Table 2 2 Control Board Terminal Descriptions Terminal Terminal Description Feedback Encoder Number For improved noise immunity run an individually shielded twisted pair per channel from the drive to the encoder In the case of a single ended encoder connect A B and Z from the drive to Ov at the encoder end See also DIP Switches page 11 For electrical ratings refer to Chapter 1 Terminal Terminal Description Digital Default configuration Number Thermistor Microtherm Ov Terminals B1 and B2 must be linked if over temperature sensors are not used The use of a motor temperature sensor is always recommended Thermistor Microtherm It is good practice to protect AC motors against sustained thermal overloads by fitting temperature sensitive resistors thermistors or switc
18. SERIAL 22 P3 DUMP MMI TX SERIAL P3 ERROR REPORT SERIAL P3 MEMORY DUMP SERIAL one P3 P3 BAUD RATE SERIAL Sus SERIAL LINKS PORT P3 TAG LIST SERIAL LINKS PORT P3 TAG LIST P3 TAG LIST TC SERIAL LINKS PORT P3 TAG LIST TAG 1 SERIAL LINKS PORT UDP XFER RX SERIAL LINKS PORT UDP XFER TX SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ UNDER VOLTS FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE UP TO ACTION WORK NG FALSE TRUE FALSE 300 600 1200 2400 9600 19200 38400 DISABLED EI ASCII FIEBD FALSE TRUE 300 600 1200 9600 6 DISABLED 5703 MASTER SLAVE FIELD BUS NEWPORT CO PROCESSOR EI ASC I UP TO gt 0000 UP TO ACTION WORK NG UP TO ACTION gt 0000 UP TO ACTION WORK NG FALSE TRUE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 indu 2 3 PARAMETERS ALARMS 115703 RCV INHIBIT FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS ACK ALARM FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS DRIVE ENABLE FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS DRIVE START FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS EXTERNAL TRIP FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS OUTPUT FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS HEALTHY FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS 5 LEVEL PARAMETERS ALARMS MOTOR TMP RST PARAMETERS ALARMS MOTOR TMP TRIP PARAMETERS ALARMS MOTR TMP INHIBIT FALSE TR PARAMETERS ALARMS MODE INITIAL STOPPED AUTOTU
19. TYPE 10 250 280kW Table 1 1 620 Vector Drive variants The 620 models are housed in chassis of similar appearance with a 32 character Man Machine Interface MMI an alphanumeric display utilising multi level menus to present all parameters diagnostics and alarms refer to Documented separately in HA463284 5845 620 8 9 10 Manual Addendum 620 Vector Drive HA463584 1 22 Product Overview Figure 1 1 The chassis size increases with power rating The models are further identified by the product code refer to PRODUCT CODE in this chapter Optional Equipment The following equipment options are available for the 620 Vector Drives 1 Dynamic Braking Module fitted internally This 15 a factory fitted option and usually fitted as standard 2 UL 1 Top Cover 3 Glandbox COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION This manual refers to various connector terminals within the equipment which are accessible to the user for installation purposes An exploded view of a 620 Vector Drive is shown in Figure 1 1 Fixing Point Fixing Point Status LEDs MMI LCD Buttons Chassis or Stack Power Control Board Terminals Terminals lt Fixing Point Figure 1 1 620 Vector Drive Exploded View 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Product Overview 1 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION The following paragraphs provide technical information regarding the features and performance characteristics of the 620 Vector Drives
20. DIGIN 3 4 Bae VALUE FOR TRUE 287 0 01 UTERE VALUE FOR FALSE 288 0 00 Bib el OUTPUT 529 0 00 5 sns DESTINATION TAG 289 93 fout te DIGIN 4 E5 dur VALUE FOR TRUE 523 0 01 Eau VALUE FOR FALSE 524 0 00 foc eye OUTPUT 508 0 00 5 DESTINATION TAG 525 94 OD THEE DIGIN 4 E5 521 FALSE EID PO DIGIN B6 DEST 451 71 DIGIN B7 DEST 450 70 Pees 4272 DIGIN B8 DEST 452 72 DIGIN 1 E2 DIGIN 2 E3 DIGIN 3 E4 DIGIN 4 5 VALUE FOR TRUE Value that Destination TAG assumes when input is TRUE 7 VALUE FOR FALSE Value that Destination TAG assumes when input is FALSE OUTPUT Diagnostic DESTINATION TAG Destination of assumed value DIGIN 6 DIGIN B6 DEST Destination of digital input B6 JOG by default see also AUX IO DIGIN B7 DIGIN B7 DEST Destination of digital input 7 5 by default see also AUX IO DIGIN B8 DIGIN B8 DEST Destination of digital input 8 by default see also AUX IO DIGITAL OUTPUTS BLOCK DIAGRAM Offset Threshold KH Modulus Source Address Digital Output Diagnostic Figure 5 31 Digital Output 620 Vector Drive HA463584 MMI ENTRIES DIGITAL OUTPUTS DIGOUT 1 o e sues THRESHOLD HRS INPUT Eric out OFFSET Oe ae MODULUS e INVERT Fraga INE SOURCE TAG focused DIGOUT 2 f Ar Uf tus THRESHOLD f
21. ETX End of text BCC Block check character which is the character generated by taking the exclusive OR of the ASCII values of all the characters transmitted after and excluding STX up to and including ETX e g if a message with D1 Dn is 5 characters BCC C1 EOR C2 EOR D1 EOR D2 EOR D3 EOR D4 EOR D5 EOR ETX where EOR Exclusive OR The computer must check this BCC before accepting this reply as valid Also the software must be able to extract the number from the data string taking into account the protocol of the data transmission NOTE If the 620 receives the message but does not recognise the mnemonic it will respond with EOT The EOT hands back control to the computer 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 54 Function Blocks Further Enquiry and Termination The computer then assumes master status again and three options are available 1 Repeat Parameter Facility If the computer transmits a after the valid reply it causes the 620 to repeat the parameter that was just received This allows continuous monitoring of the same parameter without having to re establish the connection 2 Scroll Mode Facility ACK If the computer transmits an ACK after a valid reply it causes the 620 to fetch the next parameter from the parameter list This facility enables the computer to sequence continuously through all the parameters of the 620 3 Terminate Communication EOT The term
22. The drive is now safely configured to the factory defaults On the 620L and 620Adv these factory defaults are saved automatically on the 620Std the factory defaults must be saved using Parameter Save if wished Change Stack Size This is only be necessary if you are installing a new control board on an existing stack Warning SELECTING A DIFFERENT STACK SIZE FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE STACK RATING LABEL WILL DAMAGE THE STACK AND OR MOTOR Disconnect the power to the drive Hold down the and prog buttons while re applying power and keep both buttons depressed for at least two seconds after power up Note The start input must also be low B7 The MMI display will read DRIVE RATING 75 kW 380 460 At this stage the 620 Vector drive thinks that is 75kW model It is vitally important that it is configured for the correct power rating or irreparable damage may occur to the drive when it attempts to run the motor Press the 2 and x buttons to step through the range of power ratings until the displayed value is the same as the rating on the identification label on the side of the drive Press to select rating Select whether you wish 50Hz defaults False or 60Hz defaults True Press the to exit This saves the new settings in EEprom non volatile memory Note The drives setup parameters are unchanged Note The 620L 620Adv need to have the power cycled to reinitialise the co processor afte
23. Usually the switches will be set to give a threshold of 4V when using a differential encoder and to 9V when using a single ended encoder For encoder supply refer to Chapter 5 Function Blocks Calibration 620 Vector Drive HA463584 2 2 Pre Installation Planning Power Terminals WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD THE POWER TERMINALS CARRY ELECTRICAL POWER WHICH CAN BE LETHAL ISOLATE ALL POWER SUPPLIES AND THEN WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING THE TERMINAL COVER OR WORKING ON ANY CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MOTORS 620 Type 4 Table 2 4 620 TYPE 4 Power Board Terminals Terminal Terminal Description Power outputs forming the 3 phase supply connection for the motor Power input output This terminal is used in conjunction with the DC terminal only when two or more controllers are coupled together It carries a negative DC link voltage DC Power input output This terminal is used for connection to a braking resistor It is also used oe in conjunction with the DC terminal when two or more controllers are coupled together It carries a positive DC link voltage typically 600V referred to terminal DC Power input output for the connection of a dynamic braking resistor Refer to DYNAMIC BRAKING for further details This terminal is connected to the negative side of the link capacitor when the brake option is not fitted Power inputs These terminals are the 3 phase mains supply input 380 460 10 or
24. 9 1 Using Motor Chokes eere tre ete a een eee 9 1 Using Multiple Motors On A Single Drive 9 1 Current Loop aea os 9 2 Diagnostic Test Pins ice 9 3 APPENDIX B 620 MMI 5 9 4 APPENDIX C Z TAGS u Q eb t EIFE ER 9 8 TAGS Number xut aee peer aeter e nA er e uU 9 9 TAGS by MMI Text nennen 9 18 Cont 12 Product Overview 1 Chapter 1 Product Overview INTRODUCTION This manual provides the necessary information to plan install and commission the 620 Vector series drives IMPORTANT Motors used must be suitable for inverter duty Division of Information This manual comprises eight chapters plus appendices Chapter 1 summarises the 620 Vector drive s electrical and mechanical specifications Chapter 2 covers the planning required prior to installing a 620 Vector drive Chapter 3 describes the mechanical and electrical procedures for installing a 620 Vector drive Chapter 4 shows how to commission an installation and how to adapt the 620 Vector drive to the motor application Chapter 5 describes the function blocks Chapter 6 lists the diagnostic facilities built into the drive Chapter 7 EMC and the CE mark explains how Eurotherm are assisting their customers in achieving European conformance Chapter 8 contains routine maintenance and repair information Chapter 9 Appendices This manual
25. OFFSET INPUT INPUT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INVERT FALSE INVERT FALSE INVERT FALSE E KG E G E KG CALIBRATDON 00f CALIBRATDON 00f OFFSET 0 003 OFFSET 0 00 0 MODULUS FALSEI MODULUS FALSE FALSE 0 Appendices 9 1 3 FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TR 9 1 4 Appendices Text SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER INPUT SCALING REF SETUP PARAMETERS ENCODER INPUT SCALING REF SYSTEM CONFIGURE 0 DIAGRAM SPT SUM1 SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O BLOCK DIAGRAM SPT SUM2 SYSTEM CONFIGURE DIAGRAM SPT SUM3 5 5 DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PEEK DATA 0 000 5 5 5 SCALE 100 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS SETUP PARAMETERS STOP RATES READY DELAY 0 000 SECS SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED MAX SPEED 1500 RPM150q SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANOUT 1 C5 ANOUT 1 0 004 SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANOUT 2 5 2 0 004 SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED ENCODER LIWES SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED REFSPEED SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 ANALOG INPUTS ANIN 1 SETUP PARAMETERS ENCODER INPUT SCALING REF EN ODER CNT SYSTEM
26. PARAMETERS SET UP SETPOINT Actual value of local setpoint LOCAL KEY ENABLE Enables the local key on the op station this must be set TRUE to allow the operator to toggle between local and remote modes START UP VALUES SETPOINT Default Value of local setpoint on power up REV DIRECTION Default Value of local direction on power up PROGRAM Default mode of op station prog key on power up LOCAL Default mode of op station local key on power up LOCAL RAMP See Ramps RAMP ACCEL TIME Acceleration time used while in local mode RAMP DECEL TIME Deceleration time used while in local mode S RAMP The amount of S in local mode RAMP OUTPUT Diagnostic 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 6 Function Blocks AUX 1 MMI ENTRIES iat AUX 1 0 mee ees AUX START 66 TRUE START 70 TRUE Linked to 450 AUX JOG 67 TRUE JOG INPUT 71 FALSE Linked to 451 AUX ENABLE 68 TRUE ENABLE 72 FALSE Linked to 452 XE REM SE ENABLE 791 FALSE oe REMOTE SEQ 786 0x0000 ieee aie SEQ STATUS 787 0 0 0 PARAMETERS Aux Start Aux Jog and Aux Enable Allow the drive to be started and stopped by software EM B6 B7 Drive Enable B8 Dotted lines denote default connections Figure 5 5 Aux I O Start Jog and Enable Also allow the drive to be started and stopped by software alone These parameters are by default connected to there respective terminals WAR
27. 100 00 TORQUE LIMITS Pu hc POS TORQUE LIMIT 157 150 00 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 6 Function Blocks Bees WAY os NEG TORQUE LIMIT 158 E noe oP a MAIN TORQUE LIM 159 150 00 100 00 P cse e a SYMMETRIC TQ LIM 153 TRUE ACTUAL POS I LIM 13 31 44 gy tee ACTUAL NEG I LIM 14 31 44 5 gt 243 ete CURRENT LIMIT 585 150 00 CURRENT LIMIT 16 FALSE CURRENT FEEDBACK 78 0 00 5 TERMINAL VOLTS 480 0 VOLTS Eod DC LINK VOLTS 613 594 VOLTS 1 e DC VOLTS UNFLT 684 594 VOLTS To TORQUE DEMAND 9 0 00 Re TORQUE FEEDBACK 10 0 00 PARAMETERS MAG CURRENT 453 set by Autotune ROTOR TIME CONST 458 set by Autotune DIRECT TORQUE CONTROL DIRECT SPT POS DIRECT SPT NEG Analog 2 TORQ DMD ISOLATE HX DIRECT RATIO TORQ DMD ISOLATE AUX TORQUE DMD ADVANCED 1 GAIN 149 ROTOR TEMP Tr COMP COLD Tr COMP 784 TORQUE LIMITS DIRECT ENABLE E Torque Demand AUX TORQUE DMD Figure 5 13 Speed Loop Bypasses the speed loop NOTE This mode is over ridden while the drive is stopping and during autotune Additional torque demand Current loop gain is not a critical parameter and it should not normally be necessary to change it from the factory default valu
28. BLOCK DIAGRAM Reset Value Raise Input Lower Input External Reset PARAMETERS RESET VALUE RAMP RATE RAISE INPUT LOWER INPUT MAX VALUE MIN VALUE EXTERNAL RESET RAISE LOWER O P RAISE LOWER INIT 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Ramp Rate RAISE LOWER RAMP Figure 5 6 Raise Lower Ramp Output This reset value is pre loaded directly into the output when EXTERNAL RESET is TRUE or at power up It is clamped by MIN and MAX VALUEs This is the rate of change of output value The raise and lower rates are always equal Command to raise lower output These are normally connected to digital inputs in order to be useful Maximum minimum ramp output clamp This is a plain clamp not a ramped MIN SPEED setting If EXTERNAL RESET is TRUE the output of the raise lower block is set to the reset value If an auto reset feature is required then the System Reset TAG can be linked to the external reset Diagnostic Engineering only Power up output value of the raise lower function block To make the output of this block persistent then the output must be added to the list of persistent data in SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA 5 0 Function Blocks INVERSE TIME MMI ENTRIES INVERSE TIME He oe Netz AIMING POINT DELAY DOWN RATE UP RATE pure NS INVERSE TIME O P 15 116 105 00 117 60 0 SECS 118 10 0 SECS 148 120 0 SECS 11 96
29. HOME FALSE PARAMETERS HOME HOME INPUT PARAMETERS HOME HOME OUTPUT PARAMETERS HOME HOMING DISTANCE PARAMETERS HOME LINEAR O P FALSE PARAMETERS HOME OVERSHOOT LIMIT PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME AIMING POINT PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME DELAY PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME DOWN RATE PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME INVERSE TIME O P PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME UP RATE PARAMETERS JOG PARAMETERS JOG JOG ACCEL RATE PARAMETERS JOG JOG DECEL RATE PARAMETERS JOG JOG SPEED 1 PARAMETERS JOG JOG SPEED 2 PARAMETERS JOG MODE FALSE PARAMETERS OPERATORS PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 1 PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 1 INPUT A FALSE TRUE PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 1 FALSE TRUE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 24 Appendices BIASC PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS OPERATORS 0PERATORS
30. Motor Power Hp 460V as specified 150 150 200 250 300 300 400 450 within NEC NFPA 70 Output Current A 180 520 Input Current A 23 180 550 Input Bridge 14 813 000 Fuse Rating Circuit Breaker 4 A Approx loss 3kHz kW 7 5 Output Voltage max Input Voltage Output Overload 15096 for 60 seconds 0 to 120Hz 0 to 40 C Output Frequency Fan Inlet temperature Range IP Rating IP20 Enclosure IPOO power terminals Earth Leakage Current gt gt 100mA Product must be permanently earthed Table 1 15 1 Suitable for earth referenced TN and non earth referenced IT supplies 2 IMPORTANT 3 line impedance MUST be provided for each module and is assumed in the quoted input current values Failure to do so will severely curtail DC link capacitor lifetime and could result in damage to the input bridge 3 Input current quoted is for 380V supply at the stated motor power Motor efficiency of 93 is assumed 4 Short circuit protection Semiconductor Fuses should be installed in the 3 phase supply to the drive module to protect the input bridge Circuit breakers or HRC fuses will not protect the input bridge 620 Vector Drive HA463584 1 1 0 Product Overview Special Considerations For Installations Requiring Compliance with UL Standards Motor Overload Protection An external motor overload protective device must be provided by the installer Motor overload protection is provide
31. PRESET INPUT INPUT PRESET INPUT 8 I O BLOCK DIAGRAM S RAMP DEST S RAMP EXTERNAL RESET FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP RESET VALUE SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP ACCELERATION SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP JERK 1 SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP QUENCH FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS PRESET INVERT O P SETUP PARAMETERS PRESET PRESET O P FALSE TRUE SYSTEM CONFIGURE BLOCK DIAGRAM DEST SETUP PARAMETERS RATES CONTACTOR DELAY SETUP PARAMETERS JOG ACCEL RATE SETUP PARAMETERS 906 DECEL RATE SETUP PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME SETUP PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME AIMING POINT SETUP PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME DELAY SETUP PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME DOWN RATE SETUP PARAMETERS RATES SETUP PARAMETERS RATES RUN STOP TIME SETUP PARAMETERS RATES RUN STOP LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS RATES PRE START DELAY 0 500 SECS 0 SETUP PARAMETERS RATES FAST STOP TIME SETUP PARAMETERS RATES FAST STOP LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS RATES USE SYSTEM RAMP FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS RATES STOP ZERO SPEED SETUP PARAMETERS CALIBRATION SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ MOTOR TMP TRIP SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ HEATSINK LEVEL CONFIGURE DRIVE MAX SPEED RPM CONFIGURE DRIVE ENCODER LINES SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ZERO SPEED Z
32. SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY AUTOTUNE MISC FILT GAIN 500 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY AUTOTUNE MISC FLTGN DSP 50 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY AUTOTUNE MISC SYSTEM USE ONLY AUTOTUNE MISC SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY AUTOTUNE MISC SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS AIbJUST No Text SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS SETUP PARAMETERS ENCODER INPUT SCALING FBK SCALE SETUP PARAMETERS ENCODER INPUT SCALING FBK SCALE SETUP PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC ERROR O P SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION START UP VALUES SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION START UP VALUES SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION START UP VALUES FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION START UP VALUES L FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION START UP VALUES FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION SET UP SETPOINT SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN 4 SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION LOCAL RAMP RAMP SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION LOCAL RAMP SETUP PARAMETERS 5 LOCAL RAMP ACCEL TIME 10 SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION LOCAL RAMP DECEL TIME 10 No Text No Text No Text SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION Text Text FALSE TRUE Text FALSE TRUE Text SYSTEM CONFIGURE DIGITAL INPUTS FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE DIGITAL INPUTS SYSTEM
33. TRIP CO PRO PRESENT ANIN 1 C3 ANIN 3 F2 ANIN 4 F3 ANIN 5 4 ANOUT ANOUT COAST 1 C5 2 F5 STOP PROGRAM STOP DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN B6 JOG B7 START B8 ENABLE 1 E2 2 E3 3 4 4 E5 DIGOUT 1 E6 DIGOUT 2 E7 DIGOUT 3 E8 RAISE LOWER SPT SUM O P 1 SPT SUM O P 2 SPT SUM O P 3 RAMP OUTPUT PRESET SPEED SETPOINT SEQ RUN INPUT 6 7 11 8 9 10 78 480 613 623 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 27 12 559 28 150 29 31 32 33 34 35 26 22 37 36 38 39 40 41 521 42 43 44 45 46 385 386 47 110 48 49 SEQ OUTPUT ENCODER 50 51 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 599 100 00 11 96 11 96 11 96 FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE OK FALSE FALSE FALSE STOPPED TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 oe oe oe VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS 99 oe oe oe oe 6 2 Diagnostics and Fault Finding The Diagnostics menu allows the user to monit
34. The 620 Vector Drives must not be repaired by the user If repair is necessary return the unit to Eurotherm Drives WARNINGS BEFORE DISCONNECTING THIS UNIT ENSURE ISOLATION OF THE MAIN SUPPLY TO TERMINALS MI M2 AND M3 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE DC LINK TERMINALS DC amp DC TO DISCHARGE TO SAFE VOLTAGE LEVELS 50V FAILURE TO DO SO CONSTITUTES AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD RETURNED MATERIAL The following procedures are recommended in the unlikely event of a fault which necessitates return of a controller or part to Eurotherm Drives a Contact your nearest Eurotherm Drives service centre to arrange return of the controller if necessary Refer to the list of Eurotherm Drives service centres at the end of this Chapter Eurotherm Drives will request the model number and serial number of the controller please have this information to hand prior to making contact b Oncontacting your local Eurotherm Drives service centre a Returned Material Authorisation RMA code will be issued if necessary which must be used as a reference on paperwork returned with the controller c Package and despatch the controller NOTE In the unlikely event that a 620 is to be returned to Eurotherm Drives it must be suitably packaged If Styrofil chips or equivalent are being used as a packing material then the controller must first be sealed in a polythene bag or similar to prevent ingress of the packing material Disposa
35. The output starts at zero The output is limited at 30000 300 00 LOGIC FUNCTION These generic function blocks can be configured to perform one of a number of simple functions upon a fixed number of inputs BLOCK DIAGRAM LOGIC FUNC 1 FALSI FALSI FALSI NOT 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 4 2 Function Blocks MMI ENTRIES LOGIC OPERATOR 1 foo weed INPUT A 720 FALSE fiu E INPUT B 721 FALSE Disa ee INPUT C 722 FALSE fusus s s TYPE 723 NOT A zc Boa nas OUTPUT 724 TRUE fi LOGIC OPERATOR 2 Dis eaten es INPUT A 727 FALSE Loe INPUT B 728 FALSE os suu 2 INPUT C 729 FALSE fil yw TYPE 730 NOT A OUTPUT 731 TRUE LOGIC OPERATOR 3 INPUT 734 FALSE fi i3 INPUT B 735 FALSE flr INPUT C 736 FALSE 52 737 OUTPUT 738 TRUE fies LOGIC OPERATOR 4 Pans INPUT A 741 FALSE Bei ets INPUT B 742 FALSE INPUT 743 FALSE fiii ue TYPE 744 NOT A OUTPUT 745 TRUE PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS INPUT A General purpose logic input INPUT B General purpose logic input INPUT C General purpose logic input TYPE see below The operation to be performed on the three inputs to produce the output value The operations that can be selected are Enumerated Value Type 0 NOT A AND A B C NAND A B C OR A B C NOR A
36. SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR FALSE SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR FALSE SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR FALSE SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR FALSE SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR FALSE SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR FALSE SYSTEM PEEK DIAGNOSTIC 5 5 DIAGNOSTIC PEEK DATA SYSTEM PEEK DIAGNOSTIC PEEK SCALE SYSTEM PEEK DIAGNOSTIC PEEK TAG SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA WRITE FALSE TRUE SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA COUNT SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA TAG No 2 SYSTEM PERSISTENT DA
37. VALUE OPERATOR DIAGRAM VALUE SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 2 IF SWITCH A B lt lt gt ABS gt ABS 1 DECODE ON DELAY DELAY TIMER MINIMUM PULSE TRAIN WINDOW SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 BLOCK DIAGRAM VALUE SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 3 IF SWITCH B C B lt A lt C A gt Bt ABS A gt ABS gt B4 1 DECODE ON DELAY DELAY TIMER MINIMUM PULSE TRAIN WINDOW SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SYSTEM CONFIGURE DIAGRAM VALUE SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 4 IF SWITCH A B lt lt gt ABS gt 1 DECODE ON DELAY DE
38. 365 1 0000 see sie qued RATIO 0 364 1 0000 p uso SIGN 1 367 POS SIGN 0 366 POS DIVIDER 1 369 1 0000 DIVIDER 0 368 1 0000 du us et LIMIT 370 100 00 5 0 371 0 00 5 Linked to 305 1 372 0 00 5 Linked to 308 s INPUT 2 373 0 00 5 Linked to 111 deans SPT SUM O P 2 385 0 00 5 SETPOINT SUM 3 L Boma tates RATIO 1 376 1 0000 teh RATIO 0 375 1 0000 mp SIGN 1 378 POS ARUM es se SIGN 0 377 POS sey DRE eds DIVIDER 1 380 1 0000 DIVIDER 0 379 1 0000 LIMIT 381 100 00 INPUT 0 382 0 00 1 383 0 00 5 sere siia INPUT 2 384 0 00 a sa ar Tae hg value SPT SUM O P 3 386 0 00 5 BLOCK DIAGRAM Limit Sign 0 Ratio 0 Divider 0 100 A x Input 0 1 24 Input 2 TB E Output A Input 1 x Ka E Divider 1 100 Ratio 1 Sign 1 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 2 3 Figure 5 1 Setpoint Sum ALGORITHM limit limit limi X Ratio0 0 190 RatioO 1 x signo DividerO Output Son apes x Ratiol Inputl 7oRatiol sont 100 limit Input2 limit Equation 5 1 Setpoint Sum RATIO 0 RATIO 1 Input scaling a signed quantity 3 0000 Res
39. Dirty earth busbar The dirty earth busbar is used for all power earths i e protective earth connections 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 24 Installation Procedure Enclosure metalwork The enclosure metalwork busbar is used for all parts of the cubicle including panels busbar doors and back plate It is also used as a reference for any 110 or 220V control used and for the control transformer screen Power screen busbar The power screen busbar is only for power screened cables which do not have to go directly to the 620 drive module such as motor cables braking choppers and their resistors or to other drive modules refer to appropriate Product Manual to identify these Noise coupled onto the incoming screens must flow to earth directly so as not to contaminate the rest of the cubicle Hence the power screen busbar should be placed as close to the point of cable entry as possible Signal control screen The signal control screen busbar is to be used for signal control screened cables busbar which do not have to go directly to the 620 drive module This busbar should also be placed as close as to the point of cable entry as possible For optimum EMC performance copper rails with a substantial cross section should be used for the busbar Screened cables are best u clamped to busbars to ensure an optimum HF connection The five separate earth busbars should be insulated from the mounting panel and connected to a single earth
40. FROM LIST READ SAME Figure 5 24 Reading Data From The 620 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 20 S SENDING DATA Establish Connection Connection is established with a particular 620 by sending EOT GID GID UID UID Followed immediately by the data transfer STX C2 D D2 D3 ETX BCC Note that the data transfer message is identical to that transmitted by a 620 when giving a valid reply The symbols of this message are defined as follows STX start of text character C1 C2 parameter specified by mnemonic D1 to DN parameter value ETX end of text character BCC Block Check Character verification check digit which is again the exclusive OR of C1 to ETX inclusive and must be calculated by the computer before transmission Responses After transmission of the whole message the 620 responds to it by sending ACK NAK or by giving no reply 1 Positive acknowledgement ACK When the 620 has received the message it performs the following tasks a Checks for any parity errors in the message b Verifies that the BCC character corresponds to the data pattern received Verifies that C1 C2 command characters are a valid mnemonic that may written to d Verifies that the data D1 to DN 15 valid and not out of range e Updates the selected parameter with the new value contained in the message Only when all these ta
41. General The MMI display menus provides full access to all the drive s parameters Output Frequency 0 240Hz for higher frequencies contact Eurotherm Drives Technical Support Switching Frequency 5 or 3kHz depending on type Preset Speeds 8 Overload rating 150 for 60s Speed control range 0 8 x base speed 1000 1 of max speed Speed control precision 0 01 steady state of max setpoint digital setpoint 0 1 steady state of max setpoint analogue setpoint Speed ref resolution 0 01 digital 0 025 analogue 12 bit Stopping Modes Ramp Fast stop Coast Protection The 620 Vector series drives will trip under the following conditions Short circuit line line Short circuit line earth Earth fault Overcurrent gt 220 Overvoltage Undervoltage Stall Overspeed 5703 repeater error External trip Heatsink overtemperature Motor thermistor overtemperature Diagnostics and monitoring Full diagnostics monitoring is provided by the MMI display and status LEDs Inputs and Outputs The following range of inputs and outputs are provided 5 Analogue Inputs 4 programmable 2 Analogue Outputs both programmable Digital Inputs 24V DC for Run Fast Stop Coast Stop Jog Enable Ramp Hold Preset 1 2 and 3 the last 4 inputs are programmable Three programmable digital outputs are provided 24V DC A 24V DC supply is available for interfacing external digital inputs 10 and 10V DC supply is availab
42. OR EDGE 1 0 ED E 5 SWITCH A B C A B C lt lt C A gt B 5 gt ABS gt 1 8 HOLD BINARY DEQODE ON DELAY OFF DELAY TIMER MINIMUM PULSE PULSE TRAIN UP DWN COUNTEH IF C SWITCH A B C B lt A lt C A gt B ABS gt ABS gt 1 8 HOLD BINARY DEQODE ON DELAY OFF DELAY TIMER MINIMUM PULSE PULSE TRAIN UP DWN COUNTEH 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 2 5 BIASC ses SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 3 TYPB IF C ABS SWITCH A B A A B C B A C A gt B 5 gt ABS gt 1 8 HOLD BINARY DEQODE ON DELAY OFF DELAY TIMER MINIMUM PULSE PULSE TRAIN UP DWN COUNTEH PARAMETERS OPERATORS OPERATOR PARAMETERS OPERATORS OPERATOR PARAMETERS OPERATORS OPERATOR PARAMETERS OPERATORS OPERATOR PARAMETERS OPERATORS OPERATOR PARAMETERS OPERATORS OPERATOR 4 SWITCH A B A B lt lt C gt ABS gt 1 8 HOLD BINARY DEQODE ON DELAY OFF DELAY TIMER MINIMUM PULSE PULSE TRAIN WINDOW UP DWN COUNTEH PARAMETERS OP STATION PARAMETERS OP STATION LOCAL PARAMETERS OP ST
43. PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS SETPOINT 1 PRESET PRESET PRESET PRESET PRESET PRESET PRESET PRESET RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INVERT O P O P SELECT 1 SELECT 2 SELECT 3 EXTERNAL RESET LOWER MAX VA MIN VA RAISE RAISE INPUT LUE LUE INPUT LOWER INIT LOWER O P RAMP RATE RESET VALUE RAMPS S RAMP RAMPS RAMPS AUTO RAMPS RAMP RAMPS RAMP RAMPS RAMP RAMPS RAMP RAMPS RAMP RAMPS RAMPS RAMPS REF REF REF RAMPS R
44. Reverse full speed 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 D8 _ Ov Isolated Power for an encoder connected 09 _ GND connected internallytoAQ S O For improved noise immunity run an individually shielded twisted pair per channel from the drive to the encoder In the case of a single ended encoder connect A B and Z from the drive to Ov at the encoder end See also DIP Switches page 11 For electrical ratings refer to Chapter 1 Jog is not operational in local mode Start is not operational in local mode Except the PID 620 Vector Drive HA463584 2 0 Pre Installation Planning Table 2 2 Control Board Terminal Descriptions Continued Terminal Terminal Description Aux Digital I O Default Configuration Number Digital I P 1 RAMP HOLD If the input is held true the System Ramp output is frozen at the last value irrespective of the Ramp Setpoint Input When false the System Ramp output follows the Ramped Setpoint with a delay determined by the Ramp time parameters Ramp Hold is overridden by Ramp Reset Digital 2 3 4 PRESET SELECT 1 2 3 These digital inputs are used to select 1 of 8 preset inputs as shown below Preset Selection 1 PRESET 1 selected 24 PRESET 2 selected Ov PRESET 3 selected 24 PRESET 4 selected 24 PRESET 8 selected The preset inputs are set using the MMI By default the presets are connected to one of the speed demand inputs Digital O P 1 ZERO S
45. The inverse time function carries out two separate functions a Protects the stack against over heating by winding back the current after a defined period b clamps the torque demand in the field weakening region to ensure that it does not exceed the motor current limit At speeds greater than base speed the output of the inverse time will normally be less that 150 due to the Magnetisation current element of Motor Current Motor Current Id Mag Current Iq Torque NOTE The inverse time function is the only limit that works in motor current all others work in Torque limit Torque limit takes no account the Magnetisation Current I Limi 150 Aiming Point 105 100 Delay Ramp Dmd Limit PARAMETERS AIMING POINT DELAY DOWN RATE UP RATE STOP RATES MMI ENTRIES To STOP RATES i t Sec n 0 n 10 n 70 Figure 5 7 Inverse Time The level to which the inverse time function will wind back the current limit The delay before the inverse time starts to operate The Rate at which the current is wound back The rate at which the inverse time function recovers aes ones RUN STOP TIME 120 10 0 SECS mper RUN STOP LIMIT 121 60 0 SECS Dahe FAST STOP TIME 123 1 0 SECS E FAST STOP LIMIT 124 60 0 SECS bates USE SYSTEM RAMP 125 TRUE fully PRE START DELAY 122 0 500 SECS f READY DELAY 352 0 000 SECS EYES CONTACTOR DELAY 112 0 5 SECS
46. o 5 den 74 2 Fas Y e Sf AN a lt M e co T H 5 Q a u D 55 C 0 0 51 DX a a lt 3 n 7 2 5 040 MCB1 ae LABELLED DB1 8 DB2 ON TYPE 7 CHASSIS L1 L2 L3 PE Figure 2 5 Minimum wiring configuration for 620 series drives 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Pre Installation Planning 2 5 Full Installation 34905 zaon 1109 Na AQvaH AHLIWSH 43445 0932 410 43345 310301 ee o d O 91 14 0 91 93 13 SISSVHO 2 NO cad 19 431138 1 ANALOGUE I P 5 ANALOGUE I P 4 RAMP I P 2 DIRECT RAMP I P 1 10V 10V ov 0193 009 ual 113 ASSV YOLSISAY ONDIVHS S1fidNI L3S3Hd L 80163 Pa 4015 4015 1VNOILdO g18VN3 LUIS 50f 1SV3 1SVOO 10 dd 1
47. 0 379 1 0000 are gens TERMINAL VOLTS 480 VOLIS 000 x eex99 LIMIT 381 100 00 DC LINK VOLTS 613 608 VOLTS 000 aise te INPUT 0 382 0 00 Wers DC VOLTS UNFLT 684 608 VOLTS INPUT 1 383 0 00 5 TORQUE DEMAND 9 0 00 2 2 384 0 00 aras du ade TORQUE FEEDBACK 10 0 00 2 5 SUM 3 386 0 00 SPEED LOOP f REF ENCODER SPD PROP GAIN 161 10 00 SPD INT TIME 162 100 mSECS fuv hh tus RESET 600 FALSE 52 DEFEAT 163 FALSE Ee POS CALC ENABLE 337 FALSE EEEE ENCODER SIGN 164 POS h RESET EBK POS 797 FALSE ADVANCED ek sue FEEDBACK POS 775 0x0000 SPEED FBK FILTER 673 0 500 Except OFFSET MENU SPEED DMD FILTER 662 0 750 Bog bys OFFSET 447 0 Eers ADAPTIVE THRESH 674 0 00 fu OFFSET SCALE 609 1 s w 4357 s ADAPTIVE P GAIN 675 10 00 BE M OFFSET TRIM 670 0 PWR LOSS CNTRL TEST MODE fe anos tans ENABLE 639 FALSE ENABLE 652 FALSE TRIP THRESHOLD 640 0 VOLTS Toa abe ete OFFSET 1 653 500 CONTROL BAND 657 20 VOLTS OFFSET 2 654 1000 DECEL RATE 641 2 50 5 Basti a s yt donee PERIOD 655 1000 mSECS STD TEES ACCEL RATE 644 0 50 fri e cds MAX POSITION ERR 342 100 00
48. 0 75 RPM 15 counts ms 0 0825 mm ms Typically the worst case levelling error will therefore be 0 08 cycle time of lift controller cycle time of the vector drive 0 08 10 10 1 6mm This can be halved to 1mm by adjusting the stopping distance by 1mm BLOCK DIAGRAM Home Input Output Home Dest Homing Distance 1 Encoder Scale Linear O P Figure 5 23 Home Block Diagram PARAMETERS 1 ENCODER SCALE Scalar for homing distance A value of 4 00 has the effect of converting encoder counts into lines HOME Trigger Input enables the home function HOMING DISTANCE Homing distance is specified in Encoder Counts 1 Encoder Scale 2048 line encoder equates to 8192 counts per revolution LINEAR O P Selects between linear and S velocity profiles TRUE Linear OVERSHOOT LIMIT Internal HOME INPUT Diagnostic HOME OUTPUT Diagnostic OPERATORS VALUE FUNC The value function blocks can be configured to perform one of a number of functions upon a fixed number of inputs BLOCK DIAGRAM VALUE FUNC 1 0 00 0 00 0 00 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 3 Function Blocks MMI ENTRIES OPERATORS ego VALUE OPERATOR 1 INPUT A 692 0 00 INPUT 693 0 00 INPUT C 694 0 00 5 ftx TYPE 695 IF C A 2333 OUTPUT 696 0 00 fl VALUE OPERATOR 2 fis tes INPUT A 699 0 00 ftu ses INPUT B 700 0 00 fii 3a INPUT C 701 0 00
49. 1 197 0 00 lt 259 a frac f NAMEPLATE RPM 135 1440 RPM eO INPUT 2 198 0 00 PPP TORQUE LOOP 2 5 SUM 1 46 0 00 Pe MAG CURRENT 453 30 00 2 5 SUM 2 MORES ROTOR TIME CONST 458 100 0 mSECS e RATIO 1 365 1 0000 E TORQ DMD ISOLATE 596 FALSE eO RATIO 0 364 1 0000 AUX TORQUE DMD 599 0 00 ee S1GN 1 367 POS ADVANCED eO SIGN 0 366 POS 1 GAIN 149 70 DIVIDER 1 369 1 0000 ROTOR TEMP 769 TQOSODQ 202 DIVIDER 0 368 1 0000 Tr COMP COLD 770 80500 0 000 seERL E LIMIT 370 100 00 A IE Tr COMP 784 100 009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 aae INPUT O 371 0 00 305 D TORQUE LIMITS ENPUT T 3 2 0 00 308 ses POS TORQUE LIMIT 157 150 00 2 373 0 00 3 lt 111 SA 9 NEG TORQUE LIMIT 158 150 00 2 5 SUM 2 385 0 00 MAIN TORQUE LIM 159 100 00 SETPOINT SUM 3 SYMMETRIC TQ LIM 153 TRUE 1 376 1 0000 Pewter es ACTUAL POS I LIM 13 100 00 ee RATIO 0 375 1 0000 ACTUAL I LIM 14 100 00 5 eO SIGN 1 378 POS LIMIT 585 150 00 5 0 377 POS a Ae Taare AT CURRENT LIMIT 16 FALSE ee DIVIDER 1 380 1 0000 v sade dey avons CURRENT FEEDBACK 78 0 00 ee DIVIDER
50. 208 240 10 line to line Motor earth connection This terminal may be used for the protective earth connection to the motor See Chapter 1 MECHANICAL DETAILS for tightening torque Figure 2 9 620 Type 4 Power Terminals 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Pre Installation Planning 2 3 620 Type 5 Table 2 5 620 Type 5 Power Board Terminals Terminal Terminal Description M1 U M2 V M3 W Power outputs forming the 3 phase supply connection for the motor DC Power input output This terminal is used in conjunction with the terminal when two or more controllers are coupled together It carries a negative DC link voltage DC Power input output This terminal is used for connection to a braking resistor It is also used in conjunction with the DC terminal when two or more controllers are coupled together It carries a positive DC link voltage typically 600V referred to terminal DC Power input output This terminal is connected to the negative side of the D C link capacitor No customer connection must be made to this terminal Power input output for the connection of a dynamic braking resistor Refer to DYNAMIC BRAKING for further details This terminal is connected to the negative side of the link capacitor when the brake option is not fitted Power inputs These terminals are the 3 phase mains supply input 380 460V 10 or 208 240V 10 AC line to line PE D Power earth Thi
51. 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE BLOCK DI DI BLOCK DI DI BLOCK DI CONF IGUR CONFIGUR CONF IGUR DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DI
52. 5 20 Preset Block PRESETS Input 1 2 8 Pre set input variables Select 1 2 3 Select inputs 1 INVERT O P Changes the sign of the output if TRUE the output is of the opposite sign to the selected input 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 2 Function Blocks SELECTION TABLE Three Boolean variables used to select between one of the 8 preset values Select 3 FALSE FALSE TRU Select 2 Select 1 Input FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRU TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRU S RAMP MMI ENTRIES s as 5 INPUT va ACCELERATION Lo as DECELERATION JERK 1 JERK 2 JERK 3 JERK 4 AUTO RESET EXTERNAL RESET foedo vis RESET VALUE fo 59 QUENCH AT SPEED SPEED LEVEL hee ACCEL O P hilo OVERSHOOT THRESH Reed ae ERROR THRESHOLD OUTPUT INPUT RESET RESET VALUE SYMMETRIC ACCELERATION DECELERATION JERK Table 5 1 Preset input logic 597 0 00 5 667 TRUE 106 10 00 666 10 00 107 10 00 663 10 00 664 10 00 665 10 00 669 TRUE 104 FALSE 105 0 00 5 108 FALSE 316 FALSE 612 1 00 5 253 0 00 254 5 00 5 668 0 50 5 598 0 00 5 Input value Boolean input forces output to reset value Output value during while rest is TRUE also used as initial value on start up If TRUE enables Deceleration Jerk 2 Jerk 3
53. 584S CHASSIS 169 TRUE DISABLE CO PRO 154 FALSE BRAKE THRESHOLD 411 936 MODN INDEX 412 7500 TA ee saree AD POS THRESHOLD 413 6 AD NEG THRESHOLD 414 6 eR DRIVE STATUS 168 FALSE RESET VEC VARS 167 FALSE hy EAT 155 FALSE D eiu ede ke CYCLE TIME 315 8000 Rees doux TICK LENGTH 497 15 452 SYS TIME 351 0xC352 Tig vem duy ede SPD FBK TC 319 0 10 SECS TORQUE FBK TC 320 0 10 SECS These eke ER IFB ADJUST 495 115 0 TOTAL TRIP COUNT 624 0 0000 Dya Sort SYSTEM RESET 64 FALSE lure TEST FUNCTIONS Appendices SELECT FUNCTION 418 0 SPEED PERIOD 419 1000 Pes sa SPEED AMPLITUDE 420 500 x SPEED OFFSET 421 0 CURRENT PERIOD 422 40 CURR AMPLITUDE 423 200 xx 4 wa CURRENT OFFSET 424 0 Tix sun ds end aves MEAS SPD LOOP BW 634 FALSE Di Adan eiui NO OF AVERAGES 635 30000 IMPLSE CNT LNGTH 636 30000 IMPULSE HEIGHT 637 30000 TRACE TRACE MODE 426 1 Pa re eA PRESET COUNT 427 0 PASSES 428 INDEX 772 0 000 TRIGGER 793 TRUE ADDRESS 1 430 0xD0B6 ADDRESS 2 431 0x0038 ADDRESS 3 432 0x0068 ADDRESS 4 433 0x0036 ADDRESS 5 434 0 007 ADDRESS 6 435 0 006 ADDRESS 7 436 0x0078 ADDRE
54. 620 units are supplied without braking resistors by default Page 3 18 added Note You must fit the 620 the duct Removed pages 5 69 to 5 80 Profibus information and added to Profibus manual HA389815 Page 7 6 7 8 and 9 Replaced Certificates and corrected footer information Page 8 1 added information on Disposal and Packaging Replaced prEN50178 1995 with EN50178 1988 Page 9 1 reworded sentence from Recommended choke values for cables up to 500m to Recommended choke values for cables over 50m Pages 9 4 to 9 8 Replaced MMI Listing release 4 4 with 4 8 FIRST USED ON MODIFICATION RECORD 620 Standard Com Link User Manual File Name P Vector docs manual DRAWING NUMBER EUROTHERM DRIVES 77 463584 GA387648C016 ISSUE 03 10 94
55. 91 20 04 Ctrl D Switches display to BS4504 Mode 02 Ctrl B Start Message 03 Ctrl C End Message Table 5 5 ASCII Codes Message Format lt EOT gt lt GID gt lt GID gt lt UID gt lt UID gt lt STX gt lt Indicator gt lt DATA gt lt ETX gt lt GID gt is fixed at 1 defined by Newport standard UID is calculated from the position in the tag list the first tag has address 1 Indicator This toggles the indicator led on the op station to signal data updates DATA 6 characters padded with spaces containing an ASCII representation of the data with any necessary formatting ETX the message DIP Switch Settings 1234567 8 10000010 1000 Address 11 GID UID This is the best address for TAG 1 0 0 Baud 9600 10 Strobed the characters are displayed once a CR is received Jumpers DFI 15V RS232 PORT P1 MMI ENTRIES SERIAL LINKS Te PORT P3 deis EI ASCII 5703 SUPPORT f c s PORT P1 1 MODE 227 EI ASCII f 1 BAUD RATE 228 9600 re ERROR REPORT 776 0 03 1 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 60 Function Blocks P1 MODE Selects the operating mode of the P3 Serial port Enumerated Value Type DISABLED EI ASCII FIELD BUS P1 BAUD RATE Sets baud rate for P3 serial port 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 Baud rates higher than 9600 may become unreliable with a PC ERROR REPORT See EE ERROR CODES NOTE Writing to this parameter has the ef
56. B C XOR A B 0 1 EDGE A 1 0 EDGE A AND A B C OR A B C FLIP FLOP GO O WY _ OUTPUT The result of performing the selected operation on the inputs 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 43 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Description NOT A If INPUT A is TRUE the INPUT A OUTPUT OUTPUT is FALSE otherwise the OUTPUT is TRUE INPUT B INPUT C AND A B C AND A B C If A and B and C are all TRUE INPUTA then the OUTPUT is TRUE otherwise the OUTPUT is FALSE INPUT OUTPUT INPUT NAND A B C NAND A B C If A and B and C are all TRUE INPUT A then the OUTPUT is FALSE otherwise the OUTPUT is TRUE INPUT B OUTPUT INPUT C OR A B C If at least one of A or B or C is INPUT A TRUE then the OUTPUT is TRUE otherwise the OUTPUT is FALSE INPUT OUTPUT INPUT NOR A B C NOR A B C If at least one of A or B or C is INPUT A TRUE then the OUTPUT is FALSE otherwise the OUTPUT is TRUE INPUT B OUTPUT INPUT C XOR A B If A and B are the same both INPUT A TRUE or both FALSE then OUTPUT the output is FALSE otherwise the output is TRUE INPUT INPUT 0 1 EDGE A t Duration 205 Rising Edge Trigger Input B is not used T
57. CONFIGURE DIGITAL INPUTS SYSTEM CONFIGURE DIGITAL INPUTS SYSTEM CONFIGURE DIGITAL INPUTS No Text SYSTEM CONFIGURE DIGITAL INPUTS SYSTEM CONFIGURE DIGITAL INPUTS SYSTEM CONFIGURE DIGITAL INPUTS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS DERIVATIVE SETUP PARAMETERS CALC DIVIDER 1 SETUP PARAMETERS ERROR CALC DIVIDER 2 SETUP PARAMETERS ENABLE FALSE TR SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS ERROR CALC INPUT 1 SETUP PARAMETERS ERROR CALC INPUT 2 SETUP PARAMETERS INT DEFEAT FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS INT TIME CONST SETUP PARAMETERS PROFILE GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS MODE SETUP PARAMETERS LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS 0 SCALER TRIM SETUP PARAMETERS CLAMPED FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS OUTPUT SETUP PARAMETERS POSITIVE LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS PROP GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS CALC RATIO 1 SETUP PARAMETERS CALC RATIO 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURE BLOCK DIAGRAM Pid O P DEST SETUP PARAMETERS CALC LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS PROFILER PROFILE INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS iPROFILER PROFILE MININPUT 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 1 7 Text SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 BLOCK DIAGRA
58. DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL CONF IGU BLOCK D OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS RE 5703 IAGRAM DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT N N N NPP BB DIGOUT CONFIGURE 5703 SOURCE TAG BLOCK DIAGRAM RAISE LOWER DE BLOCK DIAGRAM RAMP O P DEST ALARMS SEQ MOTOR TMP RST ENG USE ONLY REF ENCODER INPUT SCALING MIN MMI CYCLE MAX MMI CYCLE TO 0 0 06 SOURCE TAG 5 5 00 0 SOURCE TAG 9 VALUE FORO TRU VALUE FORO FAQ DESTINATION TQ VALUE FORO VALUE FORO FAQ DESTINATION VALUE FORO TRU VALUE FORO FAQ DESTINATION 0 THRESHOLDO OF MODULUS ALSE SOURCE TAG7 THRESHOLDO X MODULUS ALSE SOURCE TAG2 THRESHOLDO QF MODULUSTRUE SOURCE T G 9 CONFIGURE 5703 DESTINATION TAG ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS CYCLE TIME S RAMP AT SPEED S RA
59. HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 9 Figure 3 9 Filter Mounting Details 620 Type 6 8 STUD SEI 57 3X PLAIN 2 lt 5 WASHER ix m i BOLT NYLON 47 BUSH TYP IN 8 POSNS 219 FIXING CIRS FIXING 14 5 t 30 CIRS 18 LINE 4 HOLES 8 CLEARANCE LESEN EN DOUBLE KEYHOLE E 4 POSNS U iU 40 200999 0000 100 oor 000 EMO U DRIVE UNIT a 5845 620 Fs Se c lype 6 m i o000 CJ DB DC DC RR 000 700 R 1 2 5 1112 13 OUD D oo ml nt ELI LL LL ELI mmm mo Y E 20mm MIN LOAD PLAN FILTER MAYBE MOUNTED VIEW IN EITHER DIRECTION FLAT OR ON SIDE MOUNT IN IP54 BOX FOR WALL MOUNTINC FILTER MOUNTING DETAILS Part No C0464053U095 FOR 584s 620 6 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 2 0 Installation Procedure 944 FIXING CENTRES Figure 3 10 Filter Mounting Details 620 Type 7
60. Installation Procedure 3 9 Control Wiring General wiring diagrams for the 620 are provided in Chapter 2 Control cables should be 0 75mm 18AWG minimum It is recommended that screened cable is used with the screen connected at the drive end only Control wiring should be kept separate from power and motor wiring For normal speed control operation the speed demand signals are connected to the speed inputs control board terminals C3 C4 and F2 as required Terminal C2 or F1 may be used for the OV connection associated with the SPEED SETPOINT and DIRECT INPUT signals The maximum speed and other associated parameters are set from the MMI The START signal to the 620 Vector drive is provided by connecting a single holding contact between control board terminal B7 START and terminal B9 24V When the contact is open the motor stops When the contact is closed and both COAST STOP and FAST STOP are at 24V the motor will run A digital output indicating that the drive is healthy is provided on terminals E7 of the 620 Vector drive Any alarm which causes the drive healthy output to de activate is internally latched by the drive until both START and JOG go low 0V or open circuit The cause of the alarm is displayed by the MMI Once latched such an alarm can be cleared only by removing and re applying the START or JOG signal DYNAMIC BRAKING Introduction During deceleration or with an overhauling load the motor acts as a generato
61. Ramp 80 _ System Ramp 10 _ Stop System Ramp 0 Figure 5 9 Use System Ramp NOTES READY OUTPUT The Ready output will go high ready delay seconds after the drive has been stated and is ready to make current The ready output remains high until the drive is stopped then if ready delay gt 0 then it goes low as soon as the drive reaches stop zero speed else as the drive is quenched In case of a fault trip the ready line will also go low MODE 1 Ready Delay 0 Start Ll URN Ready 121 L Zero Speed N tl Pre Start Checks yuk 296 2 Contactor Delay Figure 5 10 Ready Timing Ready delay 0 Setting Ready delay to 0 default causes ready to be set once the drive has be initialised and is healthy Ready is held high until the drive is quenched by Start Program stop Coast Stop or the drive becoming unhealthy NOTE Ready is independent of Enable e In this mode Start and Jog are synonymous MODE 2 Ready Delay z 0 Start P Z O TROY Zero Speed dy ss tl Drive Start L t2 yuk a Figure 5 11 Ready Timing Ready delay 0 Pre Start Checks Contactor Delay Ready Delay 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 3 Setting Ready delay to none zero causes ready to be set a fixed delay after the drive becoming ready Ready is held high until the drive is stooped by Start Program stop
62. SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE DEMAND SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE FEEDBACK SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED FEEDBACK SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ HEALTH OUTPUT SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS SETUP PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME INVERSE TIME SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS 1 FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ZERO SPEED AT FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ZERO SPEED AT ZERO SETPOINT FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ZERO SPEED AT STANDSTILL FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL TRIP OK WARNING SETUP PARAMETERS RAMPS RAMPING FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS STOP RATES PROGRAM STOP FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ DRIVE START FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ DRIVE ENABLE FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ OPERATING MODE 1 INITIAL STOPPED AUTOTUNE RUN STOP RUN STOP START1 SETUP PARAMETERS 5 RATES COAST STOP FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ HEALTHY FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ RUN FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS AMIN 10 090 No Text SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 ANALOG INPUTS 3 0 20 SYSTEM CONFIGURE INPUTS ANIN 4 4 0 0 SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 ANALOG INPUTS ANIN 5 US 50 40 SYSTEM CONFIGURE OUTPUTS ANOUT 00 SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 AN
63. TAG 525 94 DIGIN 4 5 521 FALSE Eer B6 DEST 451 71 E25 Ap nes DIGIN B6 JOG 37 FALSE d DIGIN B7 DEST 450 70 as DIGIN B7 START 36 FALSE DIGIN B8 DEST 452 72 eoa DIGIN B8 ENABLE 38 FALSE f DIGITAL OUTPUTS ur DIGOUT 1 E6 THRESHOLD gt 292 0 00 INPUT 324 0 01 OFFSET 321 0 00 23 MODULUS 293 FALSE INVERT 327 FALSE SOURCE 294 17 DIGOUT 1 42 TRUE ya ss asa dw DIGOUT 2 E7 THRESHOLD gt 296 0 00 Esat v INPUT 325 O01 33 OFFSET 322 0 00 E ar sich tenes MODULUS 297 FALSE Wu INVERT 328 FALSE ES SOURCE TAG 298 12 Tus a DIGOUT 2 E7 43 TRUE DIGOUT 3 E8 OI THRESHOLD gt 300 0 00 Diets care paq 326 0 00 Bes ep dee Guar ate tes OFFSET 323 0 00 Deu MODULUS 301 TRUE ful INVERT 329 FALSE Tieg4quGu ems SOURCE TAG 302 559 rediens DIGOUT 3 E8 44 FALSE CONFIGURE 5703 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 x E as M rap SOURCE TAG 304 176 TAG 305 371 fold adt BLOCK DIAGRAM yxa aka RAISE LOWER DEST 307 0 EU RAMP DEST 308 372 y p PRESET DES
64. They allow two categories of connections 1 Connect an internal output to an internal input directly without having to come out to the drive terminals and then back in again This would waste terminal allocation and suffer conversion inaccuracies from analogue to digital and vice versa 2 Connect a given input terminal to more than one destination e g select a different value for Ramp Accel Time and Ramp Decel Time via the same digital input Data is copied from source tag to destination tag 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Chapter 6 INTRODUCTION The 620 Vector Drive provides comprehensive diagnostic alarm and trip facilities These facilities minimise the possibility of damage to the drive motor and associated components under unusual or fault conditions The diagnostics and alarm information available at the MMI display enable ready identification of conditions In the event that a fault is traced to the drive the drive should be returned to the manufacturer no corrective maintenance should be attempted DIAGNOSTICS 620 Vector Drive HA463584 TOTAL SPEED SPEED SPEED Diagnostics and Fault Finding 6 1 Diagnostics and Fault Finding SPD DMD FB UNFIL FEEDBACK ERROR TORQUE DEMAND TORQUE FEEDBACK CURRENT FEEDBACK TERMINAL VOLTS DC LINK VOLTS TERM V INTEGRAL ACTUAL POS I LIM ACTUAL NEG I LIM INVERSE TIME AT CURRENT LIMIT AT ZERO SPEED AT ZERO SETPOINT AT STANDSTILL STALL
65. Vector Drive HA463584 Diagnostics and Fault Finding 6 5 Alarm Error Codes Calibration Error Messages E000 Number of encoder lines too high Set the encoder lines to a sensible value E001 Number of encoder lines or value of max Set encoder lines or max speed to a sensible speed too small value E002 Mag current greater than drive rating Set magnetising current to a sensible value E003 Mag current greater than motor current Set magnetising current to a sensible value E004 Current loop gain parameter value too small Set current loop gain parameter to a sensible value i e actual gain is very large value E005 Motor rating is greater than 3 X Drive Rating Reduce motor rating Max speed exceeds the allowable range i e 5 Reduce max speed to less than or equal to 5 times times the nameplate rpm value the nameplate rpm value E007 Max speed X encoder lines exceeds the Reduce max speed or fit an encoder with fewer maximum encoder frequency of 250kHz lines equivalent to 5000 lines 3000 rpm E009 Rotor time constant too small Set rotor time constant to a sensible value E010 Max speed is set to a value which is more than Either 30 higher than the value of max speed rpm which existed when autotune was last carried out Autotune gathers data on the motor up to max speed rpm plus 30 and no higher Therefore any attempt to run the motor faster than this will degrade performance 1 Reduce max
66. and Jerk 4 parameters If FALSE actual deceleration acceleration Jerk 2 Jerk 3 Jerk 4 Jerk Acceleration rate in units of percent per second i e 75 00 means that the maximum acceleration will be 75 00 per second if the full speed of the machine is 1 25ms then the acceleration will be 1 25 75 0 0 937505 Deceleration rate active if SYMMETRIC TRUE Rate of change of acceleration in units of percent per second For example 75 00 means that the maximum acceleration will be 50 00 per second if the full speed of the machine is 1 25ms then the acceleration will be 1 25 50 0 0 625ms3 If SYMMETRIC TRUE then this value will be used for each of the four segments of the profile 620 Vector Drive HA463584 JERK 2 JERK 3 JERK 4 QUENCH AT SPEED AT SPEED LEVEL ACCEL O P OVERSHOOT THRESH ERROR THRESHOLD OUTPUT USEFUL EQUATIONS Function Blocks 5 3 3 If SYMMETRIC TRUE then this value will be used only for the first acceleration segment Rate of change of acceleration in units of percent per second for segment 2 Only applicable if SYMMETRIC FALSE Rate of change of acceleration in units of percent per second for segment 3 Only applicable if SYMMETRIC FALSE Rate of change of acceleration in units of percent per second for segment 4 Only applicable if SYMMETRIC FALSE If TRUE forces the ramp input to zero Diagnostic output indicating the abs input
67. and find Destination Set this to the External Reset tag number 62 which may be found in section System or in the tag number list in the appendix chapter 9 5 Return to Configure Enable flag and set this to false EXAMPLE 2 Bring Current Feedback to analogue output 2 torque demand is normally connected to this output by default 1 into System menu then into Configure Select Configure Enable and set this flag to true Find Inputs menu and select ANOUT 2 5 Go into this menu and find Source Set this to the Current Feedback tag number 78 which may be found in the MMI list in the appendix chapter 9 under diagnostics 5 Return to Configure Enable flag and set this to false EXAMPLE 3 Connect Speed Feedback to System Ramp Reset Value This would allow the drive to start a spinning motor in a smooth manner System Ramp Reset Value is a parameter which does not have a source tag associated with it as it is normally a fixed value set via the MMI Speed Feedback does not have a destination tag So the only way to do this is via an internal link 1 Go into System menu then into Configure I O 2 Select Configure Enable and set this flag to true 3 SetLink 1 Source to 11 i e tag number of speed feedback 4 Set Link 1 Destination to 63 i e tag number of Reset Value 3 Return to Configure Enable flag and set this to
68. at 2 220 W 440 W continuous rated at 2 220 W 440 W continuous Figure 3 5 Example parallel and series networks By connecting resistors in series and in parallel the braking capacity can be selected for the application Always use identical resistors in series parallel combinations for braking applications The formula to calculate the effects of series and parallel combinations are as follows Resistors in series Total resistance the sum of all the resistances i e R1 R2 R3 R4 etc resistor value Resistors in parallel Total resistance total number of resistors Power dissipation the number of resistors times the individual power dissipation of each resistor For example four Eurotherm CZ057146 56 Q 220W continuous resistors in series Total resistance 56 Q 56 Q 56 Q 56 Q 224 Q Four Eurotherm CZ057146 56 Q 220W continuous resistors in parallel Total resistance 360 140 4 Continuous power ratings in both cases are 880W four times 220W Peak powers are similarly multiplied by four Series and parallel networks can be combined as shown in Figure 3 5 The calculations are then simply combined add up the series resistances first then calculate the effect of having the appropriate numbers in parallel Each resistor Eurotherm CZ057146 56 ohms 220W continuous is the same as One resistor of 56 ohms rated at 16 220 W 3 25 kW continuous Figure 3 6 Series parallel network A speci
69. before decimal XXXXX point XXXX X to Trailing zeroes suppressed after decimal point XXXX X XXX XX to XXX XX XX XXX to XX XXX X XXXX to X XXXX Link Tag No XXXX As above Note The in the above formats is not optional It must be sent to conform to the El Bisync standard MESSAGE FORMAT READING DATA Control Characters Control Characters are ASCII binary codes which define actions rather than information The six ASCII codes used are defined in Table 5 2 ASCII HEX Control Mnemonic Definition 02h B STX Start of Text 03h AC ETX End of Text AD EOT End of Transmission AE ENQ Enquiry AF ACK Positive Acknowledge M CR Carriage return U NAK Negative Acknowledge ESC Escape RS Record separator US Unit separator Table 5 2 Control Character Definitions Enquiry The computer initially has master status with the 620 in slave status The computer begins communication by transmitting a message known as the establish connection message which is represented by the following format GID GID UID UD C2 ENQ EXAMPLE Read mnemonic II at address 00 using a terminal emulator key in the following A carriage return may also be necessary 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 53 3 Send b 0 0 0 0 I I E Receive I I gt 0 6 2 0 ETX BCC These symbols are defined as follows EOT This control character resets all instru
70. chance of being able to save the data INTERNAL LINKS f LINK 2 SOURCE 182 f LINK 2 DEST 183 686 68 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 63 NOTES The Value of PERSISTENT DATA COUNT should be monitored to check that it is approximately equal to the number of power downs The Eeprom is only rated for 10000 writes The Persistent data is not saved in the same area as the parameter data any error in the data s integrity will be flagged at power up Pressing key acknowledges the fault If this happens the drive reverts to the last saved value on the tags If the tag numbers of the persistent data area are different the data is also lost This may happen if you change the tag list SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O CONFIGURE ENABLE During the process of reconfiguration there is a danger that Tag numbers will be connected to wrong parameters To avoid this possibility all configuration links must be temporarily disconnected during the configuration process and the flag set to enabled to allow the activity Failure to reset the flag to disabled after reconfiguration will cause an alarm to be generated Configure Enabled which will prevent drive operation ANALOGUE INPUTS MMI ENTRIES ANALOG INPUTS To sies ANIN 1 C3 fisse as CALIBRATION 248 100 00 Tl dete OFFSET 358 0 00 E ederet MAX VALUE 249 100 00 fas MIN VALUE 250 100 00 DESTINAT
71. conditions such as stop start and required direction of rotation Digital outputs from the microprocessor e g Health can be used by external control equipment A detailed block diagram of the logical blocks which comprise the control circuits and software is shown in Figure 2 13 Power Circuits The 3 phase supply input on terminals L1 L2 and L3 is rectified to give a DC output to the DC Link capacitors which smooth the DC power The DC power is fed to the inverter circuits which convert the fixed voltage DC into three phase variable frequency and voltage drive outputs to the motor The frequency and voltage are set by the gate drive signals from the microprocessor During motor deceleration or at other times when the motor acts as a generator energy flows from the motor into the DC link capacitors and causes the DC link voltage to rise The drive will trip if the DC link voltage rises above a pre set level to avoid damage to the drive Dynamic Braking If the dynamic braking option is fitted an external brake resistor is switched across the DC Link by the Dynamic Brake Switch to dissipate the excess energy and prevent the drive from tripping Chapter 3 describes the power and resistance rating requirements for the dynamic braking resistor Built in diagnostics Number and logic diagnostics are values and settings that can be displayed via the diagnostic menu within the MMI These values are read only and are provided for the user
72. connection This terminal may be used for the protective earth connection to the motor See Chapter 1 MECHANICAL DETAILS for tightening torque Figure 2 11 620 Type 6 Power Board Terminals 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Pre Installation Planning 2 9 620 Type 7 Table 2 7 620 TYPE 7 Power Terminals Terminal Terminal Description Power input output This terminal is used in conjunction with the DC terminal when two or more controllers are coupled together It carries a negative DC link voltage DC Power input output This terminal is used in conjunction with the DC terminal only when two or more controllers are coupled together It carries a positive DC link voltage typically 600V referred to terminal DC 1 Power output This terminal is used for connection to a braking resistor Refer to DYNAMIC BRAKING for further details This terminal is connected to the negative side of the link capacitor when the brake option is not fitted 11 12 13 Power inputs These terminals are the 3 phase mains supply input 380 460 10 or 208 240V 10 AC line to line PE Power earth This terminal must be connected to a permanent protective earth ground Motor earth connection This terminal may be used for the protective earth connection to the motor See Chapter 1 MECHANICAL DETAILS for tightening torque Figure 2 12 620 Type 7 Power Terminals EMC Refer t
73. earth conductors 10mmj cross section and the Type 5 6 and 7 one 210mm cross section MODEL 620 TYPE 4 AND TYPE 5 SERIES Cubicle Mounted IP20 Models Model 620 Type 4 Series Protective earthing arrangements for these models are provided by a single size M4 diameter earth terminal located at the centre of the power terminal array together with two further earth terminals consisting of size M4 diameter slot head screws and washers located on the lower face of the drive as shown in the drawing below In all cases the terminals are identified with the symbol TEC 417 Symbol 5019 and are intended to be used with protective conductors terminated with compression terminations sized to accept the M4 diameter bolt fitted and the conductor size selected In Europe two incoming protective conductors shall be used for permanent earthing one connected to each of the terminals marked PE and whilst the motor protective conductor shall be connected to the remaining earth terminal located on the lower face of the drive identified with the symbol only PE Supply B Motor D Supply PE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 6 Installation Procedure Model 620 Type 5 Series Protective earthing arrangements for these models are provided by two size M5 diameter terminals located on the l
74. message are a The mains voltage is too high b Trying to decelerate a large inertia load too quickly The output current is too high Possible reasons for this alarm message are a Short circuit between motor phases b Short circuit between motor phase and earth c Too long output cables or too many parallel motors The drive heat sink temperature is too high Possible reasons for this alarm message are a The ambient air temperature is too high b A drive cooling fan has failed c Poor ventilation The motor temperature is too high Possible reasons for this alarm message are a Prolonged operation of the motor at low speed without forced cooling b Excessive load c Motor voltage rating incorrect Magnetising Current set too high The motor has stalled Possible reasons for this alarm message are a Motor loading too great b TORQUE LIMIT parameter set too low c STALL TRIP TIME parameter too low A Tag that can optionally be connected to a digital input The drive will trip if this is set high The Enable Configuration flag has been left in the enable state This needs to be disabled in order to run the drive Hardware error Hardware error The speed error is greater than the allowable threshold this may be deliberate the speed loop is saturated in which case the alarm should be inhibited in the SET UP PARAMETERS ALARMS menu Hardware error Or 620L or 620Adv has been reset t
75. output is less than AT SPEED LEVEL Threshold for AT SPEED diagnostic output Reserved Reserved Reserved hysterisis level before s ramp operates Diagnostic ramp output Note These only hold true is Jerk Jerk2 for acceleration or Jerk 3 Jerk 4 for deceleration V is the maximum speed the drive must reach In sec A is the maximum allowable acceleration in sec J is the maximum allowable value for jerk in The time needed to stop or accelerate is V t LL Seconds A as the speed is symmetrical the average speed is V 2 therefore the stopping acceleration distance can be calculated 2 3 Meters S Ramp Jerk 3 Time secs Figure 5 21 S Ramp Example acceleration graph for a velocity 60 s max Acceleration of 20 5 and a jerk of 10 s 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 34 Function Blocks BLOCK DIAGRAM S Ram Acceleration 106 Deceleration 666 Symmetric 4667 Jerk 107 Jerk 2 663 Jerk 3 664 Jerk 4 665 At Speed 316 Input 597 Quench 108 Output 598 S_Ramp Dest 103 Reset Value 105 Reset 104 Figure 5 22 S Ramp Block Diagram HOME If ENABLED the drive will use a position loop to stop the drive in a set number of encoder counts This mode is triggered from an external input usually from a mark at a fixed distance from the floor One of two velocity profiles may be chosen linear or square root
76. output 2 F5 by default this is connected to Torque demand State of program stop terminal B8 When 8 is at 24V then PROGRAM STOP is FALSE Diagnostic displaying the current state of the start input 2 B7 by default this is connected to Start terminal Diagnostic displaying the current state of the Jog input 2 B6 by default this is connected to Jog Input terminal Diagnostic displaying the current state of the Enable input B8 by default this is connected an Electronic Enable ON Enabled Diagnostic displaying the current state of the digital input 1 E2 by default this is connected to Ramp hold input ON Hold Diagnostic displaying the current state of the digital input 2 E3 by default this is connected to Preset Select input 1 Diagnostic displaying the current state of the digital input 3 E4 by default this is connected to Preset Select input 2 Diagnostic displaying the current state of the digital input 4 E5 by default this is connected to Preset Select input 3 Diagnostic displaying the current state of the digital output 1 E6 by default this is connected to At zero speed Diagnostic displaying the current state of the digital output 2 E7 by default this is connected to Drive HEALTH and is always ON when the start is low This differs from Health as displayed on a front panel 1 which remains of until health is reset by the drive being restarted Diagnostic displaying t
77. provide the correct level of interface suppression ease of installation and to ensure that electrical safety is not compromised The EMC performance can only be guaranteed to be within the limits specified when the 620 drive modules are installed together with the recommended EMC filters in accordance with the following instructions The subject of EMC is explored in more detail in a separate Eurotherm Application Manual entitled EMC Installation Guidelines for modules and systems part number HA388879 available from your local Eurotherm office EMC Filters to Reduce Line Conducted Noise An EMC supply filter may be used with each 620 drive module to reduce the line conducted noise The recommended filters are listed in table 3 3 below Table 3 3 AC Supply Filter Part Numbers for Conformance with EN55011 Class B suitable for both generic environments Eurotherm Eurotherm Filter Product Part Number 620 Type 4 0 75kW 5 5kW 380V to 460V amp CO388966U021 0 75kW 2 2kW 208V to 240V constant torque 620 Type 4 7 5kW 380V to 460V amp 4kW 208V to 240V CO388966U035 constant torque The recommended EMC filters for the type 4 and 5 620 are to be mounted behind the drive module underfloor mounting and share the same footprint They are suitable as standard for cubicle mount applications as shown in figure 3 7 For wall mounting a purpose designed pressed steel conduit Part No BA388844 is supplied with the gland box for mounti
78. replaced MMI Entries Added section called Remote Sequencing Appendix 9 replaced MMI Listing and Tag Listing for Release 4 4 Listings Added correct EC Declaration of Conformity 13015 08 10 98 Other minor amendments and corrections 4 Replaced prEN50178 1995 with EN50178 1998 and updated EC Declaration of Conformity Page 2 10 removed Note and added only 4 wire 486 is supported Page 2 11 Added Not Supported to 2 Wire and corrected Switch 8 to Switch 9 Page 3 2 Replaced Nema with UL Type 1 Page 4 7 Corrected A A B and B to A A and B B Page 5 8 Corrected Wait for Alarm to Healthy Output Bit 11 ACK ALARM changed BIT 5 to 8 REMOTE TRIP ALARM changed 789 to 790 and 790 to 789 and Bit 6 to Bit 9 Page 9 4 Added SECS after Remote Delay 790 Figure 2 5 added Encoder information Page 3 25 added Encoder Connections and Recommendations FIRST USED ON MODIFICATION RECORD 620 Standard Com Link User Manual File Name P Vector docs manual EUROTHERM DRIVES DRAWING NUMBER ZZ 463584 GA387648C016 ISSUE C 03 10 94 5 Page 1 1 added Important Motors used must be suitable 13 12 1999 FEP RM for inverter duty Page 1 2 re drawn figure 1 so will be visible when pdf files are generated Page 1 3 corrected output frequency from 400 to 240 and added for higher frequencies contact support Page 1 12 Block 9 replaced standard with recommended Page 2 7 Replaced 620Adv with 620 Com Page 3 9 Removed All
79. single length of cable to a star junction point from where all the other motor cables are attached Maintain the integrity of the shield If the cable is interrupted to insert contactors or other components the screen must be connected over the shortest possible route Table A1 in the appendix gives information on the recommended output chokes for use with long cables cables connected in parallel or when EMC output filters are used with cables greater than that specified for EMC compliance Output filters can also be used to achieve EMC and filter thermal conformance with longer cable lengths than that specified These output filters also ensure a long motor life by reducing the high dV dt and over voltage stresses applied to the motor windings by inverters These filters should be mounted as close to the 620 drive module as possible Refer to Eurotherm Drives for the selection of suitable filters 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 2 6 Installation Procedure Other Layout Considerations The proximity between the source and victim circuit has a large effect on radiated coupling The electromagnetic fields produced by drive modules falls off rapidly with distance from the cabling enclosure It should be remembered that the radiated fields from EMC compliant drive systems are measured at least 10m from the equipment over the frequency band 30 to 1000 MHz as required by EN55011 referenced by the generics and the drive product specific standard Any
80. speed to less than or equal to autocal max rpm plus 3096 Note that autocal max rpm is a parameter which may be found in the Autotune menu under Set up Parameters It records the value of max speed rpm which existed when autotune was last carried out Or 2 Re run autotune with max speed rpm set to a higher value 620 Vector Drive HA463584 6 6 Diagnostics and Fault Finding Autotune Errors D100 Drive was stopped in the middle of the Autotune If necessary re run Autotune process Motor was unable to reach the required speed Ensure that motor is able to spin freely timeout occurred Alternatively ensure that that the drive has been set up and is able to control the motor See instructions for Autotune D102 Low mains The supply voltage is not high Retry when the supply has recovered enough to enable the autotune to be carried out Drive was not able to set up the magnetising Check motor data is correct especially current timeout occurred nameplate and motor volts Check also that the motor is correctly rated for the drive D104 Mag current greater than motor or drive rating Max Speed Rpm is set to a value lower than Set Max Speed Rpm to a value greater than or motor Nameplate Rom equal to Nameplate Rom This restriction will no longer apply after autotune has been completed D106 Mag current greater than drive rating The motor is too large
81. the default connections are such that the scaled input is connected to the additional speed demand and the output to speed demand Possible additions include the sending of multiple parameters and the ability for masters to receive as well as transmit data RS 232 BUFFER INPUT TTL OUTPUT Fibre Optic O P 1 Fibre Optic I P Fibre Optic O P 2 3 Way Jumper Figure 5 26 5703 Block Diagram RCV ERROR The P3 serial port in the 5703 support mode i e setpoint repeater receives and transmits information to other 620 controllers During the receive cycle it checks that the data received is valid If invalid it raises an alarm This is only applicable in the SLAVE mode of operation Alarm delay time 1 5 Secs MMI ENTRIES SETPT RATIO Scalar input INVERT SETPOINT Inverts sign of input SCALED INPUT Input diagnostic Raw Input x Scale x Sign RAW INPUT Raw input diagnostic OUTPUT Diagnostic of P3 output 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 5 8 Function Blocks 5703 PROTOCOL SPECIFICATION This describes the protocol used for the drive to drive communications serial link or Port It is commonly used with the 5703 fibre optic isolation interface products for drive to drive communications 5703 PROTOCOL The character format is fixed at Single parameter no acknowledgement 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity First char 1 2 n 3 End Char High Data Byte Low DataByte Checksum l
82. uncontrolled manner ADVANCED SPEED FBK FILTER A simple filter function that is applied to speed feedback to reduce ripple caused by low line count encoders A value of 0 disables the filter action and 1 00 is the maximum value A typical value would be between 0 5 and 0 75 previous releases had a default of 0 5 NOTE INCREASING THE FILTER VALUE MAY MAKE THE SPEED LOOP UNSTABLE SPEED DMD FILTER A simple filter function applied to speed demand to reduce ripple A value of 0 disables the filter action and 1 00 is the maximum value ADAPTIVE THRESHOLD Level below which the ADAPTIVE P GAIN is selected ADAPTIVE P GAIN P Gain used when speed error is less than the adaptive threshold this may be used to lessen motor noise in the steady state NOTES The filter time constant in milli seconds can be calculated from the following equation 1 1 Where is value of SPD FBK FILTER SPD DMD FILTER A value of 0 5 equates to a filter time of 1 6mS 0 8 to 4 9mS and 0 9 to 10 4mS C POWER LOSS CONTROL NOTES The power loss control on the 620 works if enabled by continually comparing the actual value of DC Link volts to a threshold If the actual value of the DC Link falls below this TRIP THRESHOLD then the drive attempts to pump up the DC Link by decelerating the load thus recovering its stored kinetic energy Once the drive reaches zero speed or a time out occurs then a POWER LOSS alarm is triggered If the power supply
83. used as a relevant clauses from the following standards Particular reference should be made to machinery component 5 50081 1 1992 BSEN50081 2 1994 EN60204 1 Safety of Machinery Electrical directive y Ty BSEN50082 1 1992 and draft prEN50082 Equipment of Machines However we do 2 1992 All instructions warnings and safety supply a information of the Product Manual must be J manufacturer s adhered to declaration for when the drive is used as a component in M machinery Dr Martin Payn Conformance Officer or information only Compliant with these immunity standards without specified EMC filters EUROTHERM DRIVES LIMITED An Invensys Company NEW COURTWICK LANE LITTLEHAMPTON WEST SUSSEX BN17 7RZ TELEPHONE 01903 737000 FAX 01903 737100 Registered Number 1159876 England Registered Office Southdownview Way Worthing West Sussex BN14 8NN File Name P CE SAFETY PRODUCTS 620 LVD PRODFILE HK389950 919 1999 EUROTHERM DRIVES LIMITED ISS DATE DRN MP CHKD DRAWING NUMBER HK389950 919 23 11 99 TITLE Declarations of Conformity EUROTHERM DRIVES 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Servicing 8 Chapter 8 Servicing ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Routine maintenance of the 620 Vector Drives comprises a periodic inspection to check for a build up of dust or other obstructions that may affect the ventilation of the unit Obstructions should be removed and any dust must be cleared using dry air REPAIR
84. zero before doing a normal stop NOTE Not applicable for Fast Stop Note the System Ramp is by passed if any of the following conditions are true Ramp Hold Ramp External Reset Ramp Quench or Speed Loop Test Mode Delays the enabling of the drive to allow time for an contactor to close before current is passed This delay is only added if the pilot output is open See below for a more detailed description Sets the time during which the drive will maintain zero speed after the motor has stopped NOTE This does not effect the operation of the pilot output The term contactor delay comes from the 590 DC drive If TRUE the contactor pilot output mimics the behaviour of the 590 DC Drive The contactor is only closed while the drive is in RUN mode In this mode the drive always inserts a delay of PRE START DELAY before enabling the stack this is to allow time for the contactor to close A better way of doing this is to use an auxiliary contact into the Enable Input If FALSE the contactor is closed on power up and only opened if the drive trips Sets the threshold at which the contactor delay timer is started Sets the current limit used during a program stop This will not override the inverse time output Diagnostic Diagnostic NOTES USE SYSTEM RAMP Trim Input 10 Speed Setpoint foes LE 15052 System Ramp Stop Ramp Figure 5 8 Example 5 2 Function Blocks Stop
85. 0 Hz RUN SLIP F DIAG 627 FALSE Do sqa PERSISTENT DATA WRITE 682 FALSE 5 4224 No 1 679 0 Tix saves tone TAG No 2 680 0 J COUNT 681 0 ES s PEEK DIAGNOSTIC 340 7 PEEK SCALE 350 100 00 Tire dede d PEEK DATA 349 0xC000 0000 SAVE 208 UP TO ACTION SAVE U D CONFIGURE DRIVE SUR SCR ENCODER LINES 131 2048 xis Sopa MAX SPEED RPM 130 1500 RPM 2252335 BASE FREQUENCY 448 50 0 Hz MOTOR VOLTS 486 415 VOLTS wA es MOTOR RATING RMS 134 1 0 AMPS mm NO OF POLES 399 4 TETEE NAMEPLATE RPM 135 1440 RPM CURRENT 453 30 00 TIME CONST 458 100 0 mSECS ENCODER SUPPLY 774 50 ENCODER SIGN 164 POS MAIN TORQUE LIM 159 100 00 Pa renee AUTOTUNE FLAG 482 FALSE VASE E SPD PROP GAIN 161 10 00 TOR ES SPD INT TIME 162 100 mSECS NOTES Parameter is not at factory default f Menu is only visible with FULL MENU TRUE h Menu is hidden and is for engineering use only 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 9 APPENDIX C TAGS by Number Text Text Text Text Text MENU LEVEL DIAGNOSTICS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP TOTAL SPD DMD SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED FB UNFIL SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED ERROR 0 1 O HO
86. 000 CHANGE PASSWORD 201 0x0000 Taste BYPASS PASSWORD 69 FALSE ALARM STATUS C eus Ne HEALTH STORE 203 0x0000 sk hit ste HEALTH WORD 217 0x0010 M FIRST ALARM 218 0x0010 Aes s w HEALTH INHIBIT 219 0x0000 MENUS oe FULL MENUS 205 TRUE E a beste MENU DELAY 206 0 DATA DELAY 207 100 Breras MIN MMI CYCLE TM 313 200 Tia eos MAX MMI CYCLE TM 314 4000 LINKS crm PORT P3 VRAC E P3 MODE 237 EI BUSY RENE P3 BAUD RATE 241 9600 DE DUMP MMI TX 238 UP TO ACTION MEMORY DUMP 221 FALSE ae UDP XFER TX 240 UP TO ACTION aed UDP XFER RX 239 UP TO ACTION Vip EE ERROR REPORT 229 0x0000 LINE ERROR CNT 798 0 0000 Hass eed P3 TAG LIST h TAG 1 212 7 LIST TC 318 0 10 SECS exea ees EI ASCII US GROUP ID GID 223 0 wife atte eee UNIT ID UID 224 0 OPTION ADDRESS 230 0 OPTION VERSION 672 0 00 5703 SUPPORT Te sata SETPT RATIO 233 1 0000 E iso INVERT SETPOINT 234 FALSE Bree vedere SCALED INPUT 235 0 00 INPUT 584 0 00 folks OUTPUT 236 0 00 SYSTEM pre SOFTWARE INFO VA x 620 VERSION 782 12 21 39 Ts 1 VERSION 226 NOT PRESENT suerte DS CO PRO PRESENT 150 FALSE Tua sees CO PRO TYPE 781 0 DRIVE RATING RMS 133 9 4 AMPS vy yaa MID VOLTS 151 TRUE 3 essa CHASSI
87. 1 1992 see below for referenced standards Basic and Generic Standards Unrestricted see below distribution CEMEP 1 lt 25 Class gt 25 A Class A New EMC Product Standard draft for Power Drive Systems Restricted distribution 22G 3VFDIS 2 Class will become A EN 61800 3 This new Product Standard Draft has not yet been finally passed and more important is not EC approved An EC Declaration of Conformity for EMC can only be issued with the approval of a Competent Body It is anticipated this standard will be officially released during Q 3 4 1996 New standards to be introduced in the near future Commercial and light industry supplied directly from public electricity supply RF emission 55011 Class 50081 1 1992 EMC measures do not have to be implemented If interference in a neighbouring installation occurs the operator is responsible for taking measures to prevent interference In this case the required emission levels must be adhered to at the point of supply to the effected neighbouring installation Standards for immunity 801 2 IEC1000 4 2 Electrostatic discharge e g from electrostatically charged persons IEC801 3 IEC1000 4 3 6 Electromagnetic fields e g from portable telephones 801 4 IEC1000 4 4 Fast electrical transients burst e g from opening contacts in inductive circ
88. 2 AWG Tightening torque 0 56 0 79Nm 5 7 0 42 0 58lb ft Spring terminal connectors Terminals will accept up to 0 8mm wire 18 AWG Table 1 11 620 type 4 mechanical details 620 TYPE 5 POWER TERMINATIONS 5 slotted screws Tightening torque 2 5Nm 22 1 8lb ft EARTH GROUND Gland box not fitted 2 x M5 nut and washer tightening torque 2 5Nm 22 1lb in 1 8lb f Gland box fitted 2 x M5 stud nut and washer tightening toque 2 5Nm 22 1 b in 1 815 CONTROL TERMINATIONS Removable screw connectors for 0 75mm wire Terminals will accept up to 3 3mm wire 12 AWG Tightening torque 0 56 0 79Nm 5 7lb in 0 42 0 58lb ft Spring terminal connectors Terminals will accept up to 0 8mm wire 18 AWG Table 1 12 620 type 5 mechanical details 620 Vector Drive HA463584 1 8 Product Overview 620 TYPE 6 POWER AND EARTH Compact high current terminal blocks GROUND TERMINATIONS Terminals accommodate wire range 0 8 53 5mm 18 1 0 AWG Tightening torque 3 4 5 6Nm 30 50lb in 2 5 4 210 CONTROL TERMINATIONS Removable screw connectors for 0 75mm wire Terminals will accept up to 3 3mm wire 12 AWG Tightening torque 0 56 0 79 Nm 5 7lb in 0 42 0 58lb ft Spring terminal connectors Terminals will accept up to 0 8mm wire 18 AWG Table 1 13 620 type 6 mechanical details 620 TYPE 7 POWER AND EARTH Supply L1 31 Motor 1 3 Brake DB1 2 t
89. 25 Motor Cable length Limitotions 3 25 Other Layout Considerotions arrsa 3 26 Chapter 4 SETTING UP AND COMMISSIONING INTRODUCTION 4 1 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTIOLI 4 1 MAN MACHINE INTERFACE 4 1 Display and 4 1 Definition of terms 4 1 4 2 Comimand Keys aan an eset eee 4 3 Summaryiof MMI Keys eta ta e ta eda eed ee etas ee as 4 4 Status e eee u eet e e 4 4 NAVIGATING THE MMI MENU 4 4 Menu IU Ce UTC C 4 6 Configure Drive a 4 6 DIAGNOSTICS Cu qa w Qu 4 6 4 6 Password caniaii haha hahahaha 4 6 NOR 4 6 4 6 Parameter SAVE 4 6 4 6 MH 4 6 Cont 9 Contents Contents Page SETTING UP 4 7 Setup Step 1 Before You 4 7 Setup Step 2 Ensure The Safety Of The Complete System 4 7 Setup Step Prepare To Energise sese 4 7 Setup Step 4 Power 4 8 InitialeSet p e
90. 4000 Reserved 0 8000 Reserved EXAMPLE BIT PATTERNS Sequence Status Comment 0001 1011 0000 1011 Running 0000 0100 0100 1011 Tripped Run High UN O A UN 0000 0100 0100 0111 Tripped Run Low Enable Low 0x0008 Remote Jog Mode 0x0100 Remote Alarm Ack 0x0200 Remote Remote Trip Comment Selects Jog Speed Alarm Acknowledge Remote Trip High for OK Comment Coast Stop demanded Program Fast Stop demanded Enable demanded Drive Start demanded Drive Jog demanded Undefined Unacknowledged alarm Health Store 0 Undefined Contactor in and drive ready to be enabled Drive is enabled Zero speed Output TAG 17 Healthy Output TAG 12 Ready Output TAG 559 Undefined Undefined Undefined 0000 1100 0100 0111 Trip Acknowledged Healthy o p TRUE Alarm stays high until drive is restarted 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 8 Function Blocks USEFUL COMMANDS USING EI ASCII Start Drive Stop Drive Disable Drive Jog Setpoint 1 Jog Setpoint 2 Remote Trip Reset Alarm a Reset Alarm b Reset Alarm c DRIVE ENABLE REMOTE SEQ TAG 786 MNEMONIC LU Remote Trip Alarm Ack Jog Mode Command To Enable the drive in remote mode the following REM SEQ ENABLE 791 parameters must be TRUE REM SEQ ENABLE 791 Drive Enable 24 EMOTE R 5 DRIVE START To Star
91. 533 1 0000 n ol x LIMIT 553 100 00 fs assia ERROR O P 500 0 00 f sur wens PROFILER MODE 541 0 fk as MIN PROFILE GAIN 540 0 00 5 22 2 PROFILED GAIN 548 0 0 f aa s PROFILE INPUT 554 0 00 fs aha a siga PROFILE MININPUT 555 0 00 OUTPUT 546 0 00 CLAMPED 44 TRUE INPUTS INPUT 1 This can be either a position tension feedback or a reference offset RATIO 1 This multiplies INPUT 1 by a factor RATIO 1 DIVIDER 1 This divides INPUT 1 by a factor DIVIDER 1 INPUT 2 This can be either a position tension feedback or a reference offset Range 300 00 Default 0 00 RATIO 2 This multiplies INPUT 2 by a factor RATIO 2 DIVIDER 2 This divides INPUT 2 by a factor DIVIDER 2 INT DEFEAT This is a digital input which resets the integral term when TRUE The block transfer function then becomes P D only ENABLE This is a digital input which resets the total PID Output as well as the integral term when FALSE OUTPUTS DIAGNOSTIC PID OUTPUT This is the output of the PID block and is found in the Diagnostics menu PID ERROR This is the difference of INPUT 1 INPUT 2 and is found in the Diagnostics menu PID CLAMPED This is a logic output indicating whether the PID limits are active and is found in the Diagnostics menu PARAMETERS PROP GAIN P 620 Vector Drive HA463584 This is a pure gain factor which shifts up or down the whole Bode PID transfer f
92. 60Hz 380 to 460V 1090 50 60Hz 4 Four digits specifying the mechanical package including livery and mechanical package style First two digits Livery Standard Eurotherm Drives livery Defined customer liveries Third digit Mechanical packaging style Standard IP20 protected panel mounting IP20 and falling dirt protection UL with glandplate cable entry Enclosed IP20 through panel mounting IP20 with falling dirt protection only IP20 with glandcable entry only Note Option 3 applies to type 7 power ratings only Fourth digit Operator Station Standard product always 0 Built in MMI Two characters specifying the user interface language These characters are the same as used for computer keyboard specifications English 50Hz default English 60Hz default Three characters specifying any feedback option installed over and above the standard features of the product e g Three characters specifying any optional loaded software 000 No software options loaded N A Indicates the particular software option Two characters specifying the braking option Brake power switch not fitted Brake power switch fitted no braking resistors supplied Brake power switch fitted and default value braking resistors supplied recommended Note Extra braking resistors can be specified and ordered separately 10 Three characters specifying the aux supply required 000 No aux supply option fitted TBA Code for the filtering option
93. 7 5 Gss 58 INVERSE INPUT 1 x Cer 182 MAIN NEG TORQuE TIME 80 p E TORQUE ur Gh Se SPEED LOOP UMT ROTOR PRESET 1 es ae cE NGAI ROTOR oe Cos TIME CONST aro AUX TORQUE DEMAND PEN preser2 E4 em ES gt SETPOINT SUM 3 SETPOINT SUM 1 RATION 8 35 jur Ration G95 um Cms Gm 2 INPUTO ay ACCEL DECEL Cue lt 7 RAMP INPUT 1 G gt H 2 p J xo INPUT 2 c neute gt Ca eH es t eI system Dux 7 ug BRAKE mesrva RAMPING RESISTOR RAMP INPUT2 Lor A 2 SEE CES ioe GD CoD EXTERNAL 3 378 INDIVIDUAL Ce RATION CHASSIS RATO SIGN1 Eod ANALOGUE INPUT 4 782 NOT CONFIGURED ENCODER FEEDBACK 1 ANALOGUE INPUT 5 33 NOT CONFIGURED UN FEE lt ENCODER a RAMPHOLD 2 gt 5 p RATIO SIN No LINES MAX SPEED G source DEST X SOURCE im 5 2 GD RAISE Cea ES RASELOWER uu Mr Css OUTPUT RAISE Pads C 60 rower I9 COLE INPUT 3 X 4 GD MN G GD GD SOURCE ias G GE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 RATIO2 SicN2 EXTE
94. 94 0 00 695 OUTPUT 696 0 00 VALUE OPERATOR 2 OPOP et INPUT A 699 0 00 INPUT 700 0 00 E INPUT C 701 0 00 fors ug TYPE 702 IF C A Ete supaq OUTPUT 703 0 00 VALUE OPERATOR 3 706 0 00 Ksa INPUT B 707 0 00 fort eee INPUT C 708 0 00 Fee gis dcs TYPE 709 IF C A fih ete OUTPUT 710 0 00 VALUE OPERATOR 4 Pos passes ee INPUT A 713 0 00 Prsa INPUT B 714 0 00 INPUT 715 0 00 fo sad genes 716 IF C foo d uds OUTPUT 717 0 00 LOGIC OPERATOR 1 f INPUT A 720 FALSE Ps qd INPUT B 721 FALSE fiie t INPUT C 722 FALSE 723 NOT A OUTPUT 724 TRUE LP LOGIC OPERATOR 2 INPUT A 727 FALSE foe adu INPUT B 728 FALSE ES iu INPUT C 729 FALSE 730 i ead OUTPUT 731 TRUE LOGIC OPERATOR 3 sep INPUT A 734 FALSE eee INPUT B 735 FALSE E ede veel edis INPUT C 736 FALSE 737 NOT A OUTPUT 738 TRUE SS LOGIC OPERATOR 4 INPUT A 741 FALSE INPUT B 742 FALSE INPUT C 743 FALSE TYPE 744 NOT A OUTPUT 745 TRUE PASSWORD FREE ENTER PASSWORD 200 0x0
95. ALOG OUTPUTS ANOUT ANOUD 20 SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN 2 1 2 FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN 3 3 FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 DIGITAL OUTPUTS DIGOUT 5 FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 DIGITAL OUTPUTS DIGOUT S FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL OUTPUTS DIGOUT FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER O P SETUP PARAMETERS SUM 1 SPT SUM O P 1 SETUP PARAMETERS RAMPS RAMP OUTPUT SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINT SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS SEQ RYN INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS SEQ SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ENCODER SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS EM ACCEL TIME SETUP PARAMETERS HE DECEL TIME SETUP PARAMETERS 2 QUENCH FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS HOLD FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS 22 INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS 11 S RAMP SETUP PARAMETERS RAMPING THRESH SETUP PARAMETERS RESET SETUP PARAMETERS EXTERNAL RESET SETUP PARAMETERS VALUE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 1 0 Appendices Text SYSTEM RESERVED SE
96. ALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 i eles 2 SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE SPEED SETPOIND 20 100 SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED ENCODER LINE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED FILTER TC SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED FILTERED REF SPD SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED MAX SPEED RPM SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED REFSPEED SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED SCALE REF SP FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 INPUT 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM INPUT 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM RATIO SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 RATIO SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SIGN 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 SIGN 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SPT SUM SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 INPUT 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM INPUT 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 INPUT 2 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM LIMIT SE
97. AM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM Appendices 9 2 9 AMIN 1 46600 VOLTS CRLIBRATIQNO 00f TO 000 0 1 0 0 010405 0 15 CALIBRATDON 00f HARDWARE 0 004 MODULUS FALSEI OFFSET 0 003 SOURCE TAG 7 N N N N N N HH HARDWARE 0 004 MODULUS FALSEI OFFSET 0 003 SOURCE TAG 9 HOME DEST LOGIC OP 1 LOGIC OP 2 LOGIC OP 3 LOGIC OP 4 Pid ERROR DEST Pid O P DEST POSITION DEST PRESET DEST RAISE LOWER DE T RAMP O P DEST REF SPEED DEST SPT SUM1 OP SPT SUM2 OP DE T SPT SUM3 OP DE4T FALSE FALSE 9 0 Appendices SYSTEM 5 5 5 5 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 SYSTEM 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 5 5 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 SYSTEM 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 5 5 5
98. AMP ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER RESET ACCEL T DECEL T HOLD INPUT OUTPUT QUENCH RAMPING RESET VALUE CALC CALC CALC INCH INCH INCH INCH INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER 5 MODE EXTERNAL RESET IME IME RAMPING THRESH POSTION POSTION POSTION INCH ADVANCE INCH RETARD SCALING SCALING SCALING SCALING SCALING SCALING SCALING MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU ENCODER CNT ENCODER CNT 0 MAX OFFSET MENU OFFSET MENU OFFSET MENU OFFSET MENU OVERFLOW POS CALC RESET SATURATED 5 MODE 5 MODE TEST MODE TEST MODE MODE TEST MODE MODE SE SE OFFSET TRIM 0 PLE 5 ERR R 100q 100q FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE F
99. ARE CO PRO PRESENT FALSE TRUE SYSTEM SOFTWARE CO PRO TYPE SYSTEM SOFTWARE DRIVE RATING RMS SYSTEM SOFTWARE MID VOLTS FALSE TRUE SYSTEM SOFTWARE Pl VERSION Text Text Text Text Text 0 000 VOLTS Text Text Text FALSE Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text FALSE TRUE Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text FALSE TRUE Text FALSE TRUE Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text o O O Oo O O O O o O O o O O O Oo O OO o OO O O o o oO o o OOO DD Text 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 34 Appendices 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 620 Vector Drive HA463584 MODIFICATION EE 1 Initial issue of HA463584 replaces HA463076 Additions ET 02 98 RM and corrections for S W Release 4 X Revisions to Chapter 1 to provide clarification corrections for UL c UL Listing requirements Page 3 16 added Watt Loss column Page 1 11 changed Block 10 references from Filters to Aux Supply 2 Page 1 5 added to Analogue I O INPUT Sample Rate 12729 05 05 98 1 76mS upwards Page 1 6 added changed to Encoder Supply Output Output Voltage Changed 15 21V to 10 21V Added The output Supply Page 1 9 first sentence added 463284 Page 5 6 AUX I O
100. ATION LOCAL 11 S RAMP PARAMETERS OP STATION LOCAL PARAMETERS LOCAL DEC PARAMETERS OP STATION LOCAL RAMP OUTP PARAMETERS OP STATION SET UP PARAMETERS OP STATION SET UP LOCAL KEY ENABLE FALSE PARAMETERS OP STATION SET UP SETPOINT PARAMETERS OP STATION START VALUES PARAMETERS OP STATION START VALUES L FALSE PARAMETERS OP STATION START VALUES f FALSE PARAMETERS OP STATION START VALUES FALSE PARAMETERS OP STATION START VALUES PARAMETERS PID PARAMETERS PID CLAMPED FALSE PARAMETERS DERIVATIVE PARAMETERS PID ENABLE FALSE PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC DIVIDER 1 PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC DIVIDER 2 PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC ERROR O P PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC INPUT 1 PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC INPUT 2 PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC LIMIT PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC RATIO 1 PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC RATIO 2 PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC SIGN 1 NEG POY PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC SIGN 2 NEG PARAMETERS PID FILTER PARAMETERS INPUT PARAMETERS FALSE PARAMETERS PID INT TIME CONST PARAMETERS PID NEGATIVE LIMIT PARAMETERS PID 0 P SCALER TRIM PARAMETERS PID OUTPUT PARAMETERS POSITIVE PARAMETERS PROFILER PARAMETERS PID PROFILER
101. Bisync ASCII protocol with Group ID 0 and Unit Id 0 7 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit Even Parity Note 1 Before EUROTHERM ASCII communications may be used with the port the MODE must be set to ASCII COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS There are two classes of parameters These are prime set Command Status 620 Vector Drive HA463584 EI BISYNCH PRIME SET The following prime set parameters are supported Mnemonic EE Last Error Code gt XXXX Instrument Identity Last Tag Absolute memory address for RD Read absolute memory address specified by RA length specified by RL Length memory read by RD Tag Address Tag Info Main Software Version Serial communications Software Version Same as VO 2 P3 port only 3 V0 Zero Note version 4 1 is encoded as 0401 5 VO Oh 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Description Encoding Function Blocks 5 49 Range Access 20000 to gt R W Writing any value resets to 20000 Error codes are listed latter 20620 Returns the last tag number Valid memory addresses RS gt Address US gt Datal US gt Data2 US gt DataN gt 0000 to gt 0008 length in words Set the tag address to be used by TI RS TagAddress US gt Address US gt Data US gt NegLimit US gt PosLimit US Scale US gt ReadOnly US gt FactoryDefault 20001 to gt FFFF4 20001 to gt FFFF 5 5 0 Function Blocks EE ERROR CODES Descript
102. CED RATE No Text SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED kL ACCEL 0 50 RATE No Text SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE 1 FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE SPE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE SPE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE PERIOD 1000 5 5 SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE OFFSET MENU SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE TEST MODE SYSTEM CONFIGURE 0 DIAGRAM REF SPEED SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED PWR LOSS CNTRL BAND SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER CALC REF POSTION SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER CALC REF POSTION SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER CALC REF POSTION SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER CALC REF POSTION SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP JERK 2 SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP JERK 3 SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP JERK 4 SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP DECELERATION SETUP PARAMETERS SYMMETRIC FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ERROR THRESHOLD SETUP PARAMETERS RESET FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE OFFSET MENU O SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN FILTER SERIAL LINKS EI ASC
103. CO PRO TYPE 781 1 focus DRIVE RATING RMS 133 9 4 AMPS fucks MID VOLTS 151 TRUE f 22 x CHASSIS TYPE 152 4 SOFTWARE This shows the software release number The 620 UDP parameter files are compatible between releases w x and y z where z gt 1 SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA MMI ENTRIES SYSTEM huysa PERSISTENT DATA WRITE 682 FALSE hu sua TAG No 1 679 0 2 680 0 COUNT 681 0 APPLICATION NOTE SAVING RAISE LOWER OUTPUT ON POWER LOSS The No 1 and NO 2 are saved to EEprom on the falling edged of WRITE STEP 1 Configure the persistent data function to point to the tags that you wish to saved on power down in this case TAG 678 the raise lower initialisation value SYSTEM h PERSISTENT DATA Io WRITE 682 FALSE hu ses TAG No 1 679 678 Tous TAG No 2 680 0 COUNT 681 0 STEP 2 Set up the under voltage trip level this needs to be high that the hardware trip level set a 415v DC on a 400v drive but lower enough not to cause too many writes A value of 440v is a good default value ALARMS SEQ h UNDER V LEVEL 685 440 VOLTS h UNDER VOLTS 686 TRUE STEP 3 Link the under voltage trip flag to the Write input of the persistent block INTERNAL LINKS LINK 1 SOURCE 180 686 f LINK 1 DEST 181 682 STEP 4 Link the under voltage trip flag to Aux Enable This will quench the drive giving us the maximum
104. CODER Diagnostic SPEED SETPOINT Diagnostic AUTOTUNE MMI ENTRIES Pug e E AUTOTUNE RDUM AUTOTUNE FLAG 482 FALSE MAG I AUTOTUNE 483 TRUE SET Tr lt RTD SPD 484 TRUE brats AUTOCAL MAX RPM 629 30000 RPM PARAMETERS AUTOTUNE FLAG If set the drive will begin its Autotune routine next time the drive is started MAG I AUTOTUNE Enables the tuning of the Magnetisation Current phase of the Autotune this SET TR lt RTD SPD 620 Vector Drive HA463584 requires the motor to rotate at base speed Enables the Rotor Time Constant calculation phase of Autotune 5 2 2 Function Blocks AUTOCAL MAX RPM The speed in rpm at which the last successful mag current autotune was carried out If at any later date the user increases MAX SPEED RPM to more than 30 above this value an error will be flagged This parameter is set to a high default value so that the drive may run before any autocal has been carried out SETPOINT SUM 1 3 MMI ENTRIES Sea a SETPOINT SUM 1 0 189 1 0000 1 190 1 0000 had gauss e SIGN 0 191 POS AW e SIGN 1 192 POS Bn dece dass DIVIDER 0 193 1 0000 E EET DIVIDER 1 194 1 0000 XE iR LIMIT 195 100 00 5 pm INPUT 0 196 0 00 5 Linked to 251 INPUT 1 197 0 00 Linked to 259 ceste teria INPUT 2 198 0 00 mp SPT SUM O P 1 146 0 00 5 DOES SETPOINT SUM 2 Bey DR E Cause RATIO 1
105. CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN 3 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 ANALOG INPUTS ANIN 4 SYSTEM CONFIGURE I 0 ANALOG INPUTS ANIN 5 F4 OWFSET SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM RATIO O SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 RATIO 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 SIGN 0 NEG SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SIGN 1 NEG SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 3 RATIO SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM RATIO SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SIGN 0 NEG SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 3 SIGN 1 NEG SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 3 DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM INPUT O SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 3 INPUT 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM INPUT 2 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 SPT SUM 2 2s 2 2 2 24 2 25 2 2 3 3t Bie 3 8 3 2 3 3 2 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SPT SUM SETUP PARAMETERS HOME SETUP PARAMETERS HOME LINEAR FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O BLOCK DIAGRAM SYSTEM CONFIGURE
106. Coast Stop or the drive becoming unhealthy In the case of a Start command Ready will be low during the contactor delay period More Notes Ready is independent of Enable e The delay is only inserted for Start and not for JOG ALARMS MMI ENTRIES Pad Gee ers EXTERNAL TRIP 144 FALSE suba ere TR MOTR TMP INHIBIT 146 FALSE ACK ALARM 166 TRUE eu oats STALL INHIBIT 143 FALSE STALL TORQUE 136 95 00 5 STALL SPEED 138 4 00 Em STALL DELAY 137 10 00 STALL TRIP 20 OK OVER SPD INHIBIT 145 FALSE OVER SPEED LEVEL 139 120 00 5 Bye UNDER V LEVEL 685 440 VOLTS lios 9g UNDER VOLTS 686 TRUE CEDE RUE 75 5703 RCV INHIBIT 142 FALSE SPD FBK DELAY 687 10 000 SECS fessis SPD FBK THRESHD 688 10 00 idee ots SPD FBK INHIBIT 689 FALSE hura as HEALTH INHIBIT 219 0x0000 OPERATING MODE 25 STOPPED DRIVE START 23 FALSE El DRIVE ENABLE 24 FALSE fosse READY 559 FALSE ful RUN 28 FALSE HEALTH STORE 203 0 0000 filli HEALTH WORD 217 0x0000 FIRST ALARM 218 0 0000 HEALTHY 27 TRUE HEALTH OUTPUT 12 TRUE ALARMS EXTERNAL TRIP If set generates a user alarm trip MOTOR TMP INHIBIT Disables operation of the Motor Thermistor alarm ACK ALARM Must be TRUE to allow the automatic acknowledg
107. D sets the DC Link level in volts at which the power loss operation is triggered CONTROL BAND The CONTROL BAND sets the level above the TRIP THRESHOLD at which the power loss operation is paused If the DC link level remains above this level for 500 cycles About 500ms the power loss recovery sequence is begun and the setpoint ramps back up to the demanded setpoint DECEL RATE The DECEL RATE sets the rate at which the drive decelerates the load to keep the DC Link pumped up This should be set at the drives worst operating point highest load lowest inertia ACCEL RATE The ACCEL RATE sets the rate at which the drive accelerates back up to the actual setpoint This should be set to about a 1 10th of the DECEL RATE TIME LIMIT The TIME LIMIT sets the maximum amount of time that the drives is allowed to be in the power loss mode Once this time expires the drive will trip on POWER LOSS TRIP alarm PWR LOSS ACTIVE The PWR LOSS ACTIVE is a diagnostic that indicates that the power loss is active SPEED SETPOINTS The Speed setpoint can come from one of two sources Local or Remote In Local mode the setpoint is derived directly from the Op Station value and the reset of the drives block diagram is running but not used in the calculation of the setpoint The Speed Demand has a 10 over range although input 0 only has the range 105 0046 This allows take up slack to operate over the whole speed range DIRECT SPTI This setpoint pro
108. ECTION The default destination for the PID Output is 0 which means that the block will not be operating unless its output is redirected to some other destination typically a speed setpoint This can be implemented by using the Block Diagram section of the CONFIGURE I O menu INTERNAL LIMIT FUNCTIONS PID ERROR The PID Error is internally clamped to 105 00 INTEGRAL TERM The Integral Term is internally clamped to the prevailing values of Positive Limit and Negative Limit respectively as per PID Output It is also held while the PID Output is being clamped 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 3 1 PRESET BLOCK MMI ENTRIES Pues PRESET eden due ve SELECT 1 92 FALSE Linked to 285 SUD AE SELECT 2 93 FALSE Linked to 289 poe dada SELECT 3 94 FALSE Linked to 525 S crue tenets INVERT O P 109 FALSE Se Ra dots INPUT 1 95 0 00 5 Peete ea INPUT 2 96 25 00 INPUT 3 97 50 00 m INPUT 4 98 100 00 belted INPUT 5 99 0 00 5 6 100 25 00 INPUT 7 101 50 00 INPUT 8 102 100 00 5 PRESET 110 0 00 5 OVERVIEW The Preset block allows the user to select 1 of 8 preset inputs which in turn may be connected to other blocks of inputs BLOCK DIAGRAM NPUT 1 NPUT 2 NPUT 3 NPUT 4 NPUT 5 NPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 SELECT 1 SELECT 2 INVERT O P SELECT 3 Figure
109. ED ENG USE ONLY FIELD z SCALE 1 77 SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY FIELD E SCALE 2 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD SCALE 3 CONFIGURE DRIVE ROTOR TIME CONST 100 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD z SCALE 5 SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY FIELD SCALE 6 SYSTEM USE ONLY E SCALE 7 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD 225 SCALE 8 SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM 55 SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SYSTEM CO PROCESSOR SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TERMINAL VOLTS VOLTS 0 SETUP PARAMETERS AUTOTUNE CONFIGURE DRIVE AUTOTUNE FLAG FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS AUTOTUNE I AUTOTUNE FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS AUTOTUNE SET Tr lt RTD SPD FALSE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 6 Appendices Text SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY AUTOTUNE CONFIGURE DRIVE MOTOR VOLTS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY AUTOTUNE MISC SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY AUTOTUNE MISC SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY AUTOTUNE MISC FILT GAIN 500
110. ERO SPD HYST SYSTEM SOFTWARE INFO DRIVE RATING RMS CONFIGURE DRIVE MOTOR RATING RMS 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 1 Text CONFIGURE DRIVE NAMEPLATE RPM SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL TORQUE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL DELAY SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL SPEED SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ OVER SPEED LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ No Text SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ 5703 RCV INHIBIT FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL INHIBIT FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ EXTERNAL TRIP FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ OVER SPD INHIBIT FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ MOTR TMP INHIBIT FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP SETUP PARAMETERS INVERSE TIME UP RATE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED 1 GAIN SYSTEM SOFTWARE INFO CO PRO PRESENT FALSE SYSTEM INFO MID VOLTS FALSE SYSTEM SOFTWARE INFO CHASSIS TYPE SETUP PARAMETERS FALSE SYSTEM RESERVED FALSE SYSTEM RESERVED FALSE No Text SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS POS SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS NEG TOR CONFIGURE DRIVE MAIN TORQUE LIM SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP CONFIGURE DRIVE SPD PROP GAIN CONFIGURE DRIVE SPD INT TIME SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP INT DEFEAT FALSE CONFIGURE DRIVE ENCODER SIGN NEG No Text SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ ACK ALARM FAL
111. ET SCALE and added to position error in encoder counts Scalar for offset to allow greater range Trim offset added into position error Note The total offset is a 32 bit quantity made up of the sum of offset and offset trim Total Offset Offset Offset Scale Offset Trim If enabled the phase loop offset is defeated and the offset is obtained alternately from OFFSET 1 and OFFSET 2 at a rate determined by PERIOD The test mode may be used to commission the PID for the phase loop Phase test mode offset 1 Phase test mode offset 2 Rate at which the test cycle operates Multiplicand for reference encoder Divisor for reference encoder Example Reference encoder has 1000 line and Master has 2048 lines then for 1 1 phase locking Ref Scale A and B should be set to 2048 and 1000 respectively Multiplicand for feedback encoder Divisor for feedback encoder 1 Note Encoder counts are equal to four times the number of lines on the encoder 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 27 LENGTH INTRODUCTION The length function block adds the ability to subtract a length from position error on a signal to facilitate simple cut to length and indexing applications ALGORITHM The carriage is position locked to the product the movement is limited to the track length by clamping the position error at the extreme ends of the track Once the cut point passes the carriage the error will be positive causing the car
112. Each channel has a current feedback a current demand and a resulting current error The current error is taken to a comparator and a sawtooth waveform is taken to the other input of the comparator to produce the PWM waveform The current feedback is centred on zero and scaled such that rated drive current gives 1 6v peak The current demand is centred on 5v and is scaled such that rated drive current is 2 04v peak i e 5v or 2 04v Peek memory location diagnostic Peek Diag This displays the peeked value as an analogue output A Tag may be displayed by setting PEEK TAG to the desired Tag number The default is speed feedback The value can be scaled using PEEK SCALE An absolute memory location may be displayed by setting PEEK TAG to zero and selecting the memory location with PEEK DATA This function requires the supper password 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 4 Appendices APPENDIX B 620 MMI LISTING VECTOR DRIVE RELEASE 4 8 4 0 kW 380 460v MENU LEVEL DIAGNOSTICS E TOTAL SPD DMD 6 Hives at SPEED FB UNFIL 7 SPEED FEEDBACK 1 SPEED ERROR 8 TESTET TORQUE DEMAND 9 TORQUE FEEDBACK ined CURRENT FEEDBACK fixes TERMINAL VOLTS 4 DC LINK VOLTS 61 DC VOLTS UNFLT 6 TERM V INTEGRAL ACTUAL POS I LIM TEES ACTUAL NEG I LIM INVERSE TIME O P AT CURRENT LIMIT Tu sq AT ZERO SPEED 17 295995 AT ZERO SETPOINT AT STANDSTILL 19 Vi trepido
113. FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED USE Id Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE Iq LOOPS Id PROP SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE Id Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED USE LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE Iq LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE LOOPS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYS
114. FUNCTIONS SYSTEM RESERVED 5 FUNCTIONS SELEQT FUNCTION SYSTEM RESERVED TEST FUNCTIONS PERIOD SYSTEM RESERVED 5 FUNCTIONS AMPLITUDE 500 SYSTEM RESERVED 5 FUNCTIONS OFFSET 0 SYSTEM RESERVED TEST FUNCTIONS PERIOD 40 SYSTEM RESERVED TEST FUNCTIONS SYSTEM RESERVED TEST FUNCTIONS SYSTEM RESERVED TRACE SYSTEM RESERVED MODE SYSTEM RESERVED TRACE PRESET COUNT SYSTEM RESERVED TRACE NO OF PASSES No Text FALSE TRUE SYSTEM RESERVED Ue s ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED pr ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED s ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED 12 ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED vs 2 ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED cid ADDRESS amp N SYSTEM RESERVED ADDRESS Text Text Text Text Text Text Text COO OO OOD DDO DDD Text SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE OFFSET MENU CONFIGURE DRIVE BASE FREQUENCY No Text SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN B7 DEST SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN B6 DEST SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN B8 DEST CONFIGURE DRIVE MAG CURRENT 30 SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY FIELD As SCALE 0100 SYSTEM RESERV
115. GITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL AGRAM AGRAM AGRAM AGRAM AGRAM E 5703 E 5703 5703 INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS LINKS LINKS LINKS LINKS LINKS LINKS S RAMP DEST VALUE OP VALUE OP VALUE OP VALUE OP DESTINATION T SOURCE TAG CONFIGURE ENABLE DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN SF BB oS WwW 0 N N N N NPP BP P DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIG
116. II OPTION VERSION SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED SPEED FBK FIJTER SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED THRHSH SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED ADAPTIVE P GAIN SYSTEM CONFIGURE OUTPUTS ANOUT 1 C5 HARDWARE 0 OFFSET SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG OUTPUTS ANOUT 2 F5 HARDWARE 0 OFFSET SETUP PARAMETERS RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER INIT SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA TAG No 1 SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA TAG No 2 5 5 5 5 DATA COUNT SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA WRITE SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP DC VOLTS UNFLT SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ UNDER V LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ UNDER VOLTS SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ SPD FBK DELAY SETUP PARAMETERS SEQ SPD FBK THRESHD SETUP PARAMETERS SEQ SPD FBK INHIBIT SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 1 SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 1 INPUT A 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 9 Text SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 1 SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 1 INPUT C SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 1 TYPE SWITCH A B A B C A B C B lt A lt gt ABS A gt ABS 1 DECODE ON DELAY DELAY TIMER MINIMUM PULSE TRAIN WINDOW SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS
117. IME Speed loop PI integral gain adjustment INT DEFEAT Turn speed loop in to a P only controller The PI is designed as a saturating loop i e it is normal for the output to reach saturation In order to prevent integral wind up during saturation the integral term is held constant while the output is saturated Saturation is deemed to be when the output is gt to the prevailing torque limit 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 9 ENCODER SIGN If the Encoder sign is incorrect the motor will not operate smoothly The sign of the encoder can be changed either in hardware by swapping the A and B channels or by toggling this parameter A third way of matching encoder sign to motor direction is to swap any two motor output phases SPEED FEEDBACK The 620 requires an encoder feedback device tightly coupled to the motor shaft to achieve its high level of performance This is because accurate real time measurement of shaft position is used in the vector calculations The number of encoder lines is also important to achieve high performance the higher the number of lines the greater the speed loop gain Also as a result of more lines the high frequency ripple in the torque is also reduced reducing audible noise The number of lines on the encoder is set in the SETUP PARAMETERS CALIBRATION menu An incorrect number of lines will prevent the drive from operating smoothly and in some circumstances may cause the drive to operate in an
118. INKS ets PORT P3 Hee isis EI ASCII tease GROUP ID GID 223 0 EE UNIT ID UID 224 0 Evtl OPTION ADDRESS 230 0 fausta OPTION VERSION 672 0 00 MMI ENTRIES GROUP ID GID The GID and UID together form the logical address of the drive This address is the same on both the P3 port and the P1 port 620COM only The drive will always reply to a message addressed to GID UID 0 0 This has the effect of making address 00 a broadcast address and should not be selected in a Multi drop network If the drive is connected to a host via the P3 port It is preferable that the drive is addressed as 00 so as not to conflict with the P1 address UNIT ID UID Unit address see GID OPTION ADDRESS The address used by an external network interface card for example the 6204 Profibus interface This address is only read when the external interface initialises its self so the power must be cycled after this parameter has been modified OPTION VERSION The software version number of the external network interface card This will be non zero if the card has initialised correctly Note 1 OPTION ADDRESS and OPTION VERSION are only applicable if the port mode is field bus Note 2 Only one external network interface card may be attached to the 620 at a time SUMMARY OF EI BISYNC The EI Bisync communications protocol may be used to connect to a PC running suitable software By default the ports operates at 9 6K Baud using the EI
119. ION TAG 251 196 f luu aa SCALED INPUT 390 0 00 ans 1 C3 29 0 000 VOLTS ANIN 3 2 cane a gas CALIBRATION 256 100 00 5 OFFSET 360 0 00 5 E dates MAX VALUE 257 100 00 bs MIN VALUE 258 100 00 E DESTINATION TAG 259 197 Ie ER SCALED INPUT 391 0 00 state ANIN 3 2 31 0 000 VOLTS To beds ANIN 4 F3 ficus ets CALIBRATION 261 100 00 Be ates usted OFFSET 361 0 00 5 MAX VALUE 262 100 00 5 fas MIN VALUE 263 100 00 5 REN DESTINATION TAG 264 0 Iustus Bev SCALED INPUT 392 0 00 LE ANIN 4 F3 32 0 000 VOLTS T ANIN 5 F4 flux bs CALIBRATION 266 100 00 Boxxet OFFSET 362 0 00 E ipd MAX VALUE 267 100 00 Tuus bbs MIN VALUE 268 100 00 TEN DESTINATION TAG 269 0 Tube ERN SCALED INPUT 393 0 00 ANIN 5 4 33 0 000 VOLTS Bol sas at susta ANIN FILTER 671 0 800 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 64 Function Blocks BLOCK DIAGRAM Anin Scaled Input Max Scale Offset Ch 24 Destination Address Modulu Min Figure 5 28 Analogue I P ANIN 1 C3 ANIN 3 F2 ANIN 4 F3 AND ANIN 5 F4 CALIBRATION Analogue input scaling ratio OFFSET maximum value of scaled analogue input MAX VALUE maximum value of scaled analogue input MIN VALUE Minimum value of scaled analogue input DESTINATION TAG Des
120. LAY TIMER MINIMUM PULSE TRAIN WINDOW COUNTER SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O BLOCK DIAGRAM VALUE SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 1 A FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 1 FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 1 FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 1 A NOT 9 NAND A B C OR EDGE 1 0 A B C OR A B FLOP SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 1 FALSE TRUE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O BLOCK DIAGRAM LOGIC SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 2 A FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 2 FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATOR 2 FALSE TRUE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Text SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SYSTEM CONFIGURE SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SYSTEM CONFIGURE SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SYSTEM CONFIGURE Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAME
121. LE 344 10000 Das uus REF ENCODER CNT 359 O FBK ENCODER CNT 77 0 LENGTH MENU LENGTH 765 0 LENGTH SCALE 762 1 Ele LENGTH RATE 764 100 0 fito SUBTRACT LENGTH 763 FALSE Bre ti dics INCH MENU a INCH ADVANCE 604 FALSE EI EY INCH RETARD 605 FALSE e s INCH RATE 606 10 0 CALC POSTION ENABLE 659 FALSE Exi INPUT 660 0 00 fisoee OUTPUT 661 0 Q REF SPEED fu lexus MAX SPEED RPM 353 1500 RPM folo ENCODER LINES 356 2048 E ws SCALE REF SPEED 783 TRUE x REFSPEED 357 0 00 FILTER 767 1 00 SECS p e ES FILTERED REF SPD 768 0 00 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 2 5 BLOCK DIAGRAM SPEED FILTERED REF SPD ENCODER LINES MAX SPEED RPM REF SPEED n f s OVERFLO SATURATED REF SCALE A SCALE REF SPEE Refn REF SCALE 16 bit 16 bit m POSITION ERROR FBK SCALE A 16 bit 32 bit 32 bit Fbkn Fbkn 1 j EBKSCALEB E MAX POSITION ERROR RETARD 1 ADVANCE INCH LENGTH Length LENGTH SCALE LENGTH RATE 7 SUBTRACT LENGTH cers qo eme
122. LOG OUTPUTS E ANOUT 1 C5 5 TO GET 10V 272 100 00 OFFSET 332 0 00 HARDWARE OFFSET 676 0 00 CALIBRATION 330 100 00 s MODULUS 335 FALSE Tende asam ANOUT 1 354 0 00 SOURCE TAG 273 7 ANOUT 1 C5 34 0 000 VOLTS del 1h Saya ANOUT 2 F5 TO GET 10V 275 150 00 PTS 2 OFFSET 333 0 00 HARDWARE OFFSET 677 0 00 d CALIBRATION 331 100 00 Fie ah ond gea aus MODULUS 336 FALSE Pes te tee ede ANOUT 2 355 0 00 fil s SOURCE TAG 276 9 T2 reet ANOUT 2 F5 35 0 000 VOLTS fucus DIGITAL INPUTS fo ps bs DIGIN 1 E2 aasawa aru VALUE FOR TRUE 279 0 01 do end ore wires VALUE FOR FALSE 280 0 00 bf OUTPUT 527 0 00 wats k DESTINATION TAG 281 57 pM PEET EN DIGIN 1 E2 39 FALSE JT i rg dare ries DIGIN 2 E3 VALUE FOR TRUE 283 0 01 VALUE FOR FALSE 284 0 00 B ad s OUTPUT 528 0 00 p DESTINATION TAG 285 92 E ed sa e DIGIN 2 E3 40 FALSE usui er DIGIN 3 E4 2 are quq a E VALUE FOR TRUE 287 0 01 ery VALUE FOR FALSE 288 0 00 OUTPUT 529 0 00 DESTINATION TAG 289 93 Tace Rent DIGIN 3 E4 41 FALSE DIGIN 4 E5 fas a VALUE FOR TRUE 523 0 01 VALUE FOR FALSE 524 0 00 OUTPUT 508 0 00 DESTINATION
123. M SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 SYSTEM 5 5 OFFSET SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 5 5 OFFSET 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 5 5 5 5 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 5 5 CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE CONFIGURE ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG
124. M Pid ERROR DEST SETUP PARAMETERS CALC SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ READY FALSE TRUE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SERIAL LINKS 5703 SUPPORT RAW INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SY
125. MIN PROFILE GAIN PARAMETERS PID PROFILER MODE PARAMETERS PID PROFILER PROFILE INPUT PARAMETERS PID PROFILER PROFILE MININPUT PARAMETERS PID PROFILER PROFILED GAIN PARAMETERS PID PROP GAIN PARAMETERS PRESET PARAMETERS PRESET PARAMETERS PRESET PARAMETERS PRESET PARAMETERS PRESET PARAMETERS PRESET 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 2 Appendices BIASC SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SCALE SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS PARAMETERS
126. MP SERIAL LINKS PORT P3 SYSTEM RESERVED SYSTEM RESERVED SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE No Text SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS ENG ENG 1 0 702 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 TG sy 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 REF REF REF P3 LIST P3 TAG LIST TC USE ONLY USE ONLY DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER MISCEL MISCEL OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS PHASE PHASE 5 5 DIAGNOSTIC PEEK TAG SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O BLOCK DIAGRAM SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 LANEOUS LANEOUS DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT DIGOUT ANOUT ANOUT ANOUT ANOUT ANOUT 1 2 5 POS CALC POSITION ERROR POSITION DEST POSITION OFFSET
127. Mode DISABLE 5703 TAG LIST EL ASCII MASTER NEWPORT 620Std UDP and 5703 TAG LIST EI ASCII MMI MASTER NEWPORT Transfers 620Comm UDP and 5703 TAG LIST Connected to EI ASCII MMI MASTER NEWPORT Pl Transfers UDP and 5703 TAG LIST Link EI ASCII MMI MASTER NEWPORT Configuration Transfers P1 PORT On the 620Std and 620Ink the port is connected to the port the receivers together so it is important that only one port is used at a time 620Comm Disabled Connection to External network interface EI ASCII PORT P3 MMI ENTRIES SERIAL LINKS doen P3 MODE 237 EI BUSY P3 BAUD RATE 241 9600 DUMP MMI 238 UP ACTION h ess ene MEMORY DUMP 221 FALSE UDP XFER TX 240 UP ACTION UDP XFER 239 UP TO ACTION ERROR REPORT 229 0x0000 TAG LIST lisse 1 212 7 a LIST 318 0 10 SECS 1 UDP uploads are not advised on the 620Lnk Back up and restore procedures should be performed by the ConfigEd LINK programming tool 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 4 6 Function Blocks SERIAL PORT SETUP P3 MODE Selects the operating mode of the P3 Serial port Enumerated Value Type DISABLED 5703 MASTER 5703 SLAVE FIELD BUS TAG LIST NEWPORT CO PROCESSOR EI ASCII For file transfer select Option Board During file transfers the mod
128. N TIME parameter and the inertia of the load Note The dynamic braking option is designed to cope with short term stopping or braking only It is not rated for a continuously overhauling load The following paragraphs should be used as a guide to calculate the braking requirements of the system 620 Vector Drive HA463584 0 Installation Procedure WARNING Connecting a brake resistor to a drive not fitted with brake option see product code will result in damage to this unit In the case when an internal brake option is not present the DBR terminal may be used to connect an external braking unit Brake Resistor Selection Brake resistor assemblies must be rated to absorb both peak braking power during deceleration and the average power over the complete cycle 0 0055J x nj n Peak braking power W b J total inertia kgm ny initial speed rpm P Average braking power B4 TEE tb final speed rpm te ty braking time s tc cycle time 5 Information on the peak power rating and the average power rating of the resistors must be obtained from the resistor manufacturer Alternatively if this information is not available then a large safety margin must be incorporated to ensure that the resistors are not overloaded Eurotherm Drives can supply suitable brake resistor assemblies as detailed over By connecting these resistors in series and in parallel the braking capacity can be selected f
129. NALOG OUTPUTS ANOUT RO SPEED LEVEL 0 504 0 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Text SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE ii SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SETUP PARAMETERS SYSTEM RESERVED SYSTEM RESERVED SETUP PARAMETERS MENUS DATA DELAY MENUS DATA DELAY SYSTEM RESERVED SETUP PARAMETERS PARAMETERS 1 0 1 0 1 0 17 05 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1705 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL
130. NE RUN JOG STOP RUN STOP JOG P START1 5 PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ OVER SPD INHIBIT FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ OVER SPEED LEVEL PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ READY FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ REMOTE DELAY PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ REMOTE INHIBIT FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ REMOTE TRIP OK WARNING PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ RUN FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ SPD FBK DELAY PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ SPD FBK INHIBIT FALSE PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ SPD FBK THRESHD PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL DELAY PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL INHIBIT PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL SPEED PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL TORQUE PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ STALL TRIP OK WARNING PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ UNDER V LEVEL PARAMETERS AUTOTUNE PARAMETERS AUTOTUNE AUTOCAL MAX RPM PARAMETERS AUTOTUNE I AUTOTUNE FALSE PARAMETERS AUTOTUNE SET Tr lt RID SPD FALSE PARAMETERS AUX PARAMETERS AUX I O AUX ENABLE FALSE PARAMETERS AUX I O AUX JOG FALSE PARAMETERS AUX I 0 AUX START FALSE PARAMETERS AUX FALSE PARAMETERS AUX I O JOG INPUT FALSE PARAMETERS AUX 5 FALSE PARAMETERS AUX I O REMOTE SEQ PARAMETERS AUX I O SEQ STATUS PARAMETERS AUX I O START FALSE PARAMETERS CALIBRATION PARAMETERS CALIBRATION ENCODER SUPPLY PARAMETERS HOME PARAMETERS HOME 1 SCALE PARAMETERS HOME
131. NING CARE MUST BE TAKEN IN RECONFIGURING THE START JOG AND ENABLE INPUTS AS THESE TAGS MAY DIRECTLY ENABLE THE DRIVE IF THERE ARE TO BE RECONFIGURED THEN COAST STOP INPUT SHOULD UNDER OPERATOR CONTROL THIS WILL ALLOW THE ENABLE COMMANDS TO BE OVERRIDDEN 620 Vector Drive HA463584 REMOTE SEQUENCING Function Blocks Remote Sequencing parameter allows the basic sequencing of the drive to be controlled from a remote source using single hexadecimal word Before any remote command is accepted REM SEQ ENABLE must be set TRUE while the drive is in the stopped state The REMOTE SEQ Bits are forced to zero while the REM SEQ ENABLE FALSE The state REMOTE SEQ is not saved in non volatile memory REMOTE SEQ TAG 786 Reserved bits are undefined when read and should be set Zero when written Bit Number Mask Name 0 lsb 0x0001 1 0x0002 Remote Start 0x0004 Remote Jog Remote Enable 0x0010 Reserved 0x0020 Reserved 0x0040 Reserved 0x0080 Reserved 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0x0400 Reserved 0x0800 Reserved 0x 1000 Reserved 0 2000 Reserved 0x4000 Reserved 0x8000 Reserved SEQ STATUS TAG 787 READ ONLY Reserved bits are undefined when read Bit Number Mask Name 0 155 0x0001 Coast Stop 1 0x0002 Program Stop 0x0004 Disable 0x0008 Run 0x0010 Jog 0x0020 Reserved 0x0040 Alarm 0x0080 Reserved 0x0100 Running 0x0200 Enabled 0x0400 Zero Speed 0x0800 Healthy Output 0x1000 Ready 0x2000 Reserved 0x
132. No 2372 implementing the EMC directive into UK law the requirement to CE mark for EMC applies only to relevant apparatus that has intrinsic function to the end user and which is placed on the market supplied The majority of drive modules systems sold by Eurotherm Drives will be incorporated into a higher system apparatus or machine which includes at least the motor cable and a driven load before providing intrinsic function to the end user As such the majority of Eurotherm Drives products are categorised as components CEMEP validity field 2 and it would be incorrect for Eurotherm Drives to apply the CE mark or produce an EC Declaration of Conformity in respect of EMC It is the manufacturer supplier installer of the relevant apparatus with the intrinsic function to the end user who must demonstrate conformance to the EMC directive However in a minority of cases single drives may have intrinsic function to the end user An example is that of add on intrinsic function where an existing fixed speed motor application such as a fan or a pump is converted to variable speed with an add on drive module CEMEP validity field 1 In this application Eurotherm Drives CE mark its drive module and issue an EC declaration of conformity Because the validity of mark for EMC is not known when the product is manufactured the CE mark will be applied via the pr
133. OTE Metal surfaces such as eloxized or yellow chromed e g with cable mounting or 35 mm DIN rails screws and bolts have a high RF impedance which can be very detrimental for EMC performance Care should be taken to ensure that the protective earth PE conductor exiting from the filter is connected to the protective earth connection of the 620 drive module Any additional RF earth such as a cable screen is not a protective earth The EMC filter must be permanently earthed to prevent the risk of electric shock under abnormal operating instances such as the loss of one phase of the AC supply Permanent earthing can be achieved by either Using a copper protective earth conductor of at least 10 mm or Installing a second conductor in parallel connection with the protective conductor to a separate protective earth terminal Each conductor shall on its own meet the requirements for a protective earth conductor On all recommended underfloor EMC filters two protective earth connections are provided for permanent earthing The recommended EMC filters are designed to operate from normal three phases supplies which are balanced with respect to earth earth referenced supplies This minimises the earth leakage current due to the filter capacitors between phase and earth On some specific customer sites the supply may not be balanced with respect to earth non earth referenced supplies The earth leakage currents would increase and interfere with the
134. OUT DIGOUT Q N N N N N N N BHP HP BBP BB DIGOUT 1 DEST 1 SOURCE 10 DEST 10 SOURCY 11 DEST DESTINATION TAG DIGIN 1 OUTPUT 0 003 VALUE FORO FALE VALUE FORO TRU DESTINATION DIGIN 2 OUTPUT 0 003 VALUE FORO FALE VALUE FORO TRU DESTINATION TAG DIGIN 3 OUTPUT 0 00 VALUE FORO FALE VALUE FORO TRU DESTINATION TAG DIGIN 4 OUTPUT 0 00 VALUE FORO FALE VALUE FORO TRU DIGOUTFALRfH INPUT 0 00 INVERT FALSE MODULUS ALSE OFFSET 0 004 SOURCE TAG7 THRESHOLD OF DIGOUT FALSE INPUT 0 004 INVERT FALSE MODULUS ALSE OFFSET 0 004 SOURCE TAG2 THRESHOLDO DIGOUT FALSE INPUT 0 004 INVERT FALSE MODULUSTRUE 0FFSET 0 004 SOURCE 9 THRESHOLDO FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 is els 3 SYSTEM I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS
135. P RATE 83 RAISE INPUT 85 DOG E LOWER INPUT 86 rm MIN VALUE 87 EC MAX VALUE 88 SENE EXTERNAL RESET 89 Baz INVERSE TIME TUS aus S soc AIMING POINT 116 Ayy ave son DELAY 117 Dist esses DOWN RATE 118 RATE 148 Rie Sane ce INVERSE TIME 1 STOP RATES P pa RUN STOP TIME 120 IE RUN STOP LIMIT 121 ors FAST STOP TIME 123 Ee P FAST STOP LIMIT 12 resp aeos USE SYSTEM RAMP 12 Ed PRE START DELAY 12 fate READY DELAY 352 CONTACTOR DELAY 11 power PILOT 590 MODE 777 VEM EN STOP ZERO SPEED 12 eos Sted a PROG STOP I LIM 62 COAST STOP 26 vas RAISE LOWER O P 45 0 tara a RAISE LOWER INIT 678 FALSE 0x0000 0x0C04 10 00 10 00 5 m o 0 SECS 10 0 SECS 0 00 60 0 SECS FALSE FALSE 100 00 100 00 FALSE 105 00 5 60 0 SECS 10 0 SECS 120 0 SECS 5 31 44 3 10 0 SECS 60 0 SECS 1 0 SECS 60 0 SECS 4 5 TRUE 2 0 500 SECS 0 000 SECS 0 5 SECS 2 FALSE 61 21 150 0 ALSE II m o PROGRAM STOP 22 FALSE 4 ALARMS SEQ EXTERNAL TRIP 144 TX s REMOTE INHIBIT 788 fs yes E REMOTE DELAY 790 MOTOR TMP TRIP 128 MOTOR TMP RST 309 MOTR TMP INHIBIT 1 hasse HEATSINK LEVEL 129 Beer ACK ALARM 166 T STALL INHIBIT 143 STALL TORQUE 136 VQ els Q STALL SPEED 138
136. PEED Default configuration Active High at Zero speed Digital O P 2 Health Default configuration Active High while the drive is Health or START JOG are low Digital O P 3 Ready Default configuration Active High once the drive has successfully completed is pre start checks and if Enabled will run Analog 3 Default configuration Ramped input 2 a bi directional input that is summed with C3 to form the input to the System Ramp Full speed Reverse full speed Not configured by default Not configured by default Analog O P 2 Default configuration Torque demand output 150 forward output torque 150 reverse output torque Terminal Description P1 RS 485 Serial port Only 4 wire 485 is supported Number 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Pre Installation Planning 2 DIP Switches The control PCB also houses a set of dual in line package DIP switches located to the left of the terminals The twelve switches are numbered starting with 1 on the left The switches are ON when in the UP position towards the centre of the drive and OFF when in the DOWN position towards the edge of the drive Switch 1 selects 2 or 4 wire serial communications 2 wire is selected when the switch is ON and 4 wire when the switch is OFF only 4 wire supported Switch 2 connects or disconnects the line termination network between terminals G3 and G4 The network is connected when the switch is ON and disconnected when th
137. R Accesses other parameters in the same menu level OR Modifies the selected parameter OOOO Status LEDs The status LEDs give instant diagnostic information on the condition of the drive When the LEDs are lit they indicate the following information HEALTH The drive is powered up and there are no alarms present the drive is healthy HEALTH is reset by RUN going high and the drive running RUN The RUN digital input is active the motor is running and there are no alarms present If the LED is flashing fast this indicates that the output current has exceeded the selected I T threshold The LED flashes slowly during Autotune described later BRAKE If this LED is on it indicates that the DC link voltage inside the drive has risen above the dynamic braking threshold Chapter 3 DYNAMIC BRAKING describes this in more detail LOCAL This LED indicates the drive is in LOCAL MODE when illuminated NAVIGATING THE MMI MENU STRUCTURE The MMI comprises several hundred menu options shown in Figure 4 3 The and buttons navigate through the menus When the 620 Vector drive is initially powered up the MMI displays the start up screen Pressing activates the menu structure The A and V buttons step between main menu options of the same level The button selects the displayed menu option which will either lead to a further sub menu or to an adjustable parameter When an adjustable parameter is displayed the and butt
138. R RR 5 45 5 46 Contents Contents Page 5 48 Summary of El Bisync 5 48 MESSAGE FORMAT 4 eret e Pe e Pee e Pe Ce dero ne n un nee 5 52 5708 5 Epp 5 56 5 59 PASSWORD e heh n a ER ORES 5 60 ADARMCSTAEUS ttes 5 61 MENUS 5 61 PARAMETERS 5 61 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INFO 2 5 62 SOFTWARE cete tette e tees e reete e EO Ie bee Un e e eee 5 62 SYSTEM PERSISTENT DATA 5 62 SYSTEM CONFIGURE O 0000908 5 63 ANALOGUE INPUTS e eee he 5 63 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS 5 64 INPUT 5 65 DIGITAE OUTPUTS eene 5 66 5703 5 67 BLOCK DIAGRAM ice een Pe Re ka ua u us sayas 5 67 INTERNAL LINKS I 6 riae roa RR RR RR Ris 5 68 Chapter 6 DIAGNOSTICS AND FAULT FINDING INTRO DUGTION utpa ee bes 6 1 e erster tI 6 4 Alarm Status First Alarm Alarm Status Health Store and Alarm Status Health Sfore 6 4 Alr Error Codes uuu n tede ides 6 5 Calibration Error Messag
139. RNAL RESET RESET VALUE SOURCE DEST Pre Installation Planning 2 18 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 1 Chapter 3 Installation Procedure INTRODUCTION This chapter contains the procedures required to install a 620 Vector Drive INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS Caution This product conforms to IP20 protection Due consideration should be given to environmental conditions of installation for safe and reliable operation When installing the 620 Vector Drive the following points must be considered 1 Mechanically secure fixings must be used as recommended in MOUNTING 2 The enclosure into which this product is mounted must be suitable for the working environment 3 The cooling and airflow around this product must be as recommended in VENTILATION 4 The cables and wire terminations must be as recommended and securely clamped 5 The installation and commissioning of this equipment must only be carried out by competent personnel in accordance with safe working practices MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Mounting Mounting dimensions and suitable fixing bolts are shown in Figure 3 1 The 620 Vector Drive must be mounted vertically on a cool solid flat vertical surface It must be fixed using 4 bolts or screws of the correct size through the fixing points provided at each corner at the rear of the unit The fixing points are in the form of keyholes and slots to simplify fastening or removal Ventilatio
140. Refer to figure 2 5 page 2 4 Minimum Wiring Configuration for 620 Series Drives For EMC purposes use screened cable Always terminate the screen at the drive Normally the screen is terminated within the encoder housing follow the encoder manufacturers instructions Motor Cable length Limitations Screened armoured cable has significant capacitance between the conductors and the screen which increases linearly with cable length Typically this is 200 pF per metre but this will vary with cable type and current rating Long cable lengths may have the following undesirable effects Tripping on over current as the cable capacitance is charged and discharged at the switching frequency Producing increased conducted emissions which degrade the performance of the EMC filter due to saturation EMC compliance is only guaranteed up to a maximum cable length of 50m type 4 5 6 and 7 Causes RCDs Residential Current Detection to trip out due to increased high frequency earth current Produces increased heating inside the EMC AC supply filter from the increased conducted emissions Eurotherm Drives only guarantee the thermal performance of the filters up to a specified cable length of 150m with screened cable These effects can be overcome by adding chokes at the output of the 620 drive module In applications where multiple motors are connected to a single drive minimise the length of screened armoured cable connected to the drive by using a
141. S RATES STOP ZERO SPEED SETUP PARAMETERS RATES USE SYSTEM RAMP SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP AUX TORQUE DMD SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP CURRENT FEEDBACK SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP DC LINK VOLTS SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP DC VOLTS UNFLT SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TERMINAL VOLTS SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQ DMD ISOLATE FALSE TRI SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE DEMAND SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE FEEDBACK SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS ACTUAL NEG I 11 0 004 SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS ACTUAL POS I LIMO 004 SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS 1 FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS POS TO SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS SYMMET FALSE TRUE SYSTEM SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O 620 Vector Drive HA463584 u 6 SYSTEM 6v SYSTEM ot SYSTEM SYSTEM 6z SYSTEM 6x SYSTEM 6y 5 5 9 5 5 au SYSTEM 73 SYSTEM Ov SYSTEM 74 SYSTEM TE SYSTEM 75 SYSTEM 76 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTE
142. S TYPE 152 4 60 2 DEFAULTS 785 FALSE fius CONFIGURE I O CONFIGURE ENABLE 245 FALSE ANALOG INPUTS x4 ese de VE ANIN 1 C3 Te CALIBRATION 248 100 00 Ee Shee cee Pe OFFSET 358 0 00 dou te ee MAX VALUE 249 100 00 MIN VALUE 250 100 00 DESTINATION TAG 251 196 T doeet teed SCALED INPUT 390 0 00 f 1 C3 29 0 000 VOLTS ede ANIN 3 F2 dre ua at CALIBRATION 256 100 00 Boa ene E OFFSET 360 0 00 xg MAX VALUE 257 100 00 f E MIN VALUE 258 100 00 Turku mE DESTINATION TAG 259 197 SCALED INPUT 391 0 00 3 F2 31 0 000 VOLTS Bx due val ANIN 4 F3 Peu Suet due due CALIBRATION 261 100 00 pi P OFFSET 361 0 00 ae MAX VALUE 262 100 00 set nc els MIN VALUE 263 100 00 fake ge RE DESTINATION TAG 264 0 620 Vector Drive HA463584 p PEE SCALED INPUT 392 0 00 4 32 0 000 VOLTS foo Eds ANIN 5 F4 ful yu Rus CALIBRATION 266 100 00 Toss qur ertum OFFSET 362 0 00 ngos eiua id MAX VALUE 267 100 00 Eg ades MIN VALUE 268 100 00 DESTINATION TAG 269 0 Aa SCALED INPUT 393 0 00 nu sues ANIN 5 4 33 0 000 VOLTS ANIN FILTER 671 0 800 Pssst ANA
143. SE SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS RESET VEC VARS TRUE FALSE SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS DRIVE STATUS FALSE FALSE Ooooooon o SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS HASSIS TRUE FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS 5 SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS RATIO SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS SPT MAD00 00ER SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SPEED SETPOINTS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O INTERNAL LINKS SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 RATIO 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 RATIO 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 SIGN 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 SIGN 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 DIVIDER 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 DIVIDER 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOIN
144. SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED SETUP PARAMETERS THRESHOLD SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED ROTOR TEMP SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED SPEED DMD FILT R SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED SPEED FBK FILTR SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED Tr COMP SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED Tr COMP COLD SETUP PARAMETERS ENCODER SETUP PARAMETERS DEFEAT FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED ERROR SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED UNFIL SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED FEEDBACK 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 2 8 Appendices SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINT 300 SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS DIRECT 5 0 00 SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS MAIN PD SPT 0 004 SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED SPEED SETPOINTS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED TOTAL SPD DMD SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED ZERO SPEED SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED 2 SPEED FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED ZERO SPEED FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED 2 SPEED FALSE TR
145. SETUP PARAMETERS SYSTEM SOFTWARE SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS REPORT 5 RATES SPEED LOOP SPEED LOOP PILOT 590 MODE ZERO SPEED ADVANCED ALE RL PW F SPD TORQUE LOOP TORQUE LIMITS INFO CO PRO TYPE INFO 620 VERSION REF ENCODER REF SPEED SCALE REF PEED SPEED LOOP ADVANCED Tr COMP INFO 60Hz DEFAULTS AUX I O REMOTE SEQ AUX I O SEQ STATUS R Enum A AND NAND A B C OR NOR A B C 0 1 EDGE 1 0 EDGE A AND A B C FLOP FALSE FALSE FALSE TR FALSE TR A AND A NAND A B C OR NOR A B C XOR A B EDGE A 1 0 EDQE A AND A B FLOP FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TR A AND A NAND A B C OR NOR A B C XOR A B EDGE A 1 0 EDQE A AND A B C OR A B FLOPj FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 2 1 BIASC NET SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ REMOTE INHIBIT FALSE SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ REMOTE TRIP OK WARNING SETUP PARAMETERS ALARMS SEQ REMOTE DELAY SETUP PARAMETERS AUX 5 FALSE Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 s 2 2 Appendices TAGS by MMI Text String 4 4 MENU LEVEL ALARM STATUS ALARM STATUS FIR
146. SS 8 437 0 0082 WK VARS I SCALE 0 454 100 0 5 I SCALE 1 455 77 0 I SCALE 2 456 63 05 I SCALE 3 457 50 0 I SCALE 4 586 40 0 I SCALE 5 459 35 0 I SCALE 6 460 30 0 I SCALE 7 461 25 0 I SCALE 8 462 20 0 I SCALE 9 630 11 1 SCALE 0 587 100 0 SCALE 1 588 100 0 SCALE 2 589 100 0 5 SCALE 3 590 100 0 BER ris TR SCALE 4 591 100 0 Tics o d s cen ss TR SCALE 5 592 100 0 5 Pha vanessa s TR SCALE 6 593 100 0 ee 8 TR SCALE 7 594 100 0 TR SCALE 8 595 100 0 TR SCALE 9 631 100 0 5 P she 29 AUTOTUNE MISC Sade Sadie 24 8 kimr_int 487 1000 AUTO RAMP INCRMT 488 2 LINK V FILT GAIN 489 500 TERM FILT GAIN 490 500 TERM FLTGN DSP 491 50 Di seeds eus AUTOCAL MAX RPM 492 0 RPM Did 4 diss EEN LOAD FACTOR BS 493 95 0 2040 LOAD FACTOR 2BS 494 90 05 his MIN LINK V RATIO 628 85 00 5 TERM CONTROL 3 LOAD BASE SPD 614 5 00 TVolts INT RANGE 615 50 00 SPD TV INT 0 616 50 00 TV INTGN MIN 617 100 0 5 TV INTGN MAX 618 200 0 LOOP RESPNSE nTr 619 5 FAST RESPONSE 620 102 50 Da tates PUT TERM V INTEGRAL 623 100 00 by esed s rg DIAGNOSTICS RESD h SLIP FREQUENCY 625 0 0
147. ST ALARM ALARM STATUS HEALTH INHIBIT ALARM STATUS HEALTH STORE ALARM STATUS HEALTH WORD CONFIGURE DRIVE CONFIGURE DRIVE AUTOTUNE FLAG CONFIGURE DRIVE BASE FREQUENCY CONFIGURE DRIVE ENCODER LINES CONFIGURE DRIVE ENCODER SIGN CONFIGURE DRIVE MAG CURRENT CONFIGURE DRIVE MAIN TORQUE LIM CONFIGURE DRIVE MAX SPEED RPM CONFIGURE DRIVE MOTOR RATING RMS CONFIGURE DRIVE MOTOR VOLTS CONFIGURE DRIVE NAMEPLATE RPM CONFIGURE DRIVE NO OF POLES CONFIGURE DRIVE ROTOR TIME CONST CONFIGURE DRIVE SPD INT TIME CONFIGURE DRIVE SPD PROP GAIN DIAGNOSTICS MENUS MENUS DATA DELAY MENUS DATA DELAY MAX MMI CYCLE TM MENUS DATA DELAY MIN MMI CYCLE TM MENUS FULL MENUS MENUS MENU DELAY PARAMETER SAVE PARAMETER SAVE SAVE U D PASSWORD PASSWORD BYPASS PASSWORD PASSWORD CHANGE PASSWORD PASSWORD ENTER PASSWORD SERIAL LINKS SERIAL LINKS 5703 SUPPORT SERIAL LINKS 5703 SUPPORT INVERT SETPOINT SERIAL LINKS 5703 SUPPORT OUTPUT SERIAL LINKS 5703 SUPPORT RAW INPUT SERIAL LINKS 5703 SUPPORT SCALED INPUT SERIAL LINKS 5703 SUPPORT SETPT RATIO SERIAL LINKS EI ASCII SERIAL LINKS EI ASCII GROUP ID GID SERIAL LINKS EI ASCII OPTION ADDRESS SERIAL LINKS EI ASCII OPTION VERSION SERIAL LINKS EI ASCII UNIT ID UID SERIAL LINKS PORT SERIAL LINKS PORT P1 ERROR REPORT SERIAL LINKS PORT 1 BAUD RATE SERIAL t 1 1 MODE SERIAL z
148. STEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP TORQ DMD ISOLATE SETUP PARAMETERS 5 INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS 5 OUTPUT SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP AUX TORQUE DMD SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE SETUP PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC SIGN 1 SETUP PARAMETERS PID ERROR CALC SIGN 2 SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER INCH MENU SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER INCH MENU INCH SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER INCH INCH RETARD SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER INCH MENU INCH RATE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER REF SPEED SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE OFFSET MENU 15000 1500 RECFG SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE SATURATED SETUP PARAMETERS REF ENCODER PHASE OVERFLOW SETUP PARAMETERS 5 SPEED LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS TORQUE LOOP DC LINK VOLTS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TERM V CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TERM CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY
149. T 111 373 S RAMP DEST 103 0 Bie ete vert HOME DEST 389 0 SPT SUM1 OP DEST 345 58 SPT SUM2 OP DEST 346 176 SPT SUM3 OP DEST 347 0 Pid O P DEST 552 0 Pid ERROR DEST 556 545 id POSITION DEST 341 0 REF SPEED DEST 656 0 VALUE OP 1 DEST 697 0 VALUE OP 2 DEST 704 0 VALUE 3 DEST 711 0 VALUE OP 4 DEST 718 0 ia LOGIC OP 1 DEST 725 0 LOGIC OP 2 DEST 732 0 LOGIC OP 3 DEST 739 0 LOGIC OP 4 DEST 746 0 LINKS SOURCE 180 0 DEST 181 0 SOURCE 182 0 DEST 183 0 SOURCE 184 0 DEST 185 0 SOURCE 186 0 DEST 187 0 SOURCE 560 0 DEST 561 0 SOURCE 562 0 DEST 563 0 SOURCE 564 0 DEST 565 0 SOURCE 566 0 DEST 567 0 SOURCE 568 0 DEST 569 0 SOURCE 570 0 DEST 571 0 SOURCE 572 0 DEST 573 0 SOURCE 574 0 DEST 575 0 SOURCE 576 0 DEST 577 0 SOURCE 578 0 DEST 579 0 SOURCE 580 0 DEST 581 0 SOURCE 582 0 DEST 583 0 RESERVED Dc eene ENG USE ONLY Tis ss aspe Id Iq LOOPS herede EE Id PROP GAIN 401 2 Id DEMAND 403 7500 Id DEMAND 404 2000 Id INTEGRAL 405 5000 Id INTEGRAL 406 5000 Iq INT GAIN 794 2500 Iq INTEGRAL 795 1250 h INTEGRAL 796 1250 Tie ss eee sa xw FAST ID IQ LOOPS 792 FALSE Da MISCELLANEOUS
150. T SUM 1 INPUT 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 INPUT 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 1 INPUT 2 PASSWORD PASSWORD ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD CHANGE PASSWORD ALARM STATUS ALARM STATUS HEALTH STORE MENUS FULL MENUS FALSE 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 2 Appendices Text DELAY MENUS DATA DELAY PARAMETER SAVE UP TO ACTION gt 0000 UP TO ACTION WORK NG PARAMETER SAVE SAVE U D SERIAL LINKS SERIAL LINKS PORT P3 P3 TAG LIST SERIAL LINKS PORT P3 P3 TAG LIST Text Text Text Text ALARM STATUS HEALTH WORD ALARM STATUS FIRST ALARM ALARM STATUS HEALTH INHIBIT No Text SERIAL LINKS PORT P3 MEMORY DUMP FALSE TRUE SERIAL LINKS EI ASCII SERIAL LINKS EI ASCII GROUP ID GID SERIAL LINKS EI ASCII UNIT ID UID SERIAL LINKS PORT Pl SYSTEM SOFTWARE INFO P1 VERSION SERIAL LINKS PORT 1 1 MODE DISABLED EI ASCII FJELD BYS SERIAL LINKS PORT 1 1 BAUD RATE 300 600 1200 2400 19200 38400 SERIAL PORT P3 ERROR REPORT SERIAL EI ADDRESS No Text SERIAL SUPPORT SERIAL SUPPORT SETPT RATIO SERIAL SUPPORT INVERT SETPOINT FALSE SERIAL SUPPORT SCALED INPUT SERIAL SUPPORT OUTPUT SERIAL 3 P3 MODE DISABLED 5703 MASTER SLAVE FIELD BUS NEWPORT SERIAL DUMP MMI TX UP TO ACTION gt 0000 SERIAL UDP XFER RX UDP XFER TX UP TO AC
151. TA TAG No 1 SYSTEM RESERVED SYSTEM RESERVED SYSTEM RESERVED MISC SYSTEM RESERVED AUTOTUNE MISC SYSTEM RESERVED AUTOTUNE MISC M SYSTEM RESERVED AUTOTUNE MISC SYSTEM RESERVED MISC FILT GAIN 500 SYSTEM RESERVED MISC LOAD 02B8 00f SYSTEM RESERVED AUTOTUNE MISC LOAD HACTOR B95 00f SYSTEM RESERVED AUTOTUNE MISC MIN LINK V RAT8O 00 SYSTEM RESERVED AUTOTUNE MISC TERM Y FILT GAIN 500 SYSTEM RESERVED MISC TERM FLTGN DSP 50 SYSTEM RESERVED DIAGNOSTICS RESD SYSTEM RESERVED DIAGNOSTICS RESD RUN FALSE TRUE SYSTEM RESERVED DIAGNOSTICS RESD SL P FREQUENOY 00 Hz SYSTEM RESERVED FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED FIELD WK VARS MAG I SCALE 0100 00 6 SYSTEM RESERVED FIELD VARS MAG I SCALE 1 77 005 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 3 2 Appendices SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD WK VARS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FIELD VARS 0 1 0 BW M SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE
152. TEM RESERVED USE FUNCTIONS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FUNCTIONS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE 5 FUNCTIONS FALSE TRUE SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE 5 FUNCTIONS SYSTEM RESERVED USE TEST FUNCTIONS T FUNCTION 0 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE 5 FUNCTIONS AMPLITUDE 500 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE TEST FUNCTIONS OFFSET 0 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE 5 FUNCTIONS PERIOD SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE TRACE SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE TRACE NO OF PASSES 620 Vector Drive HA463584 7 3 3 SYSTEM RESERVED TRACE PRESET COUNT SYSTEM RESERVED ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED TRACE ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED TRACE ADDRESS amp SYSTEM RESERVED ADDRESS SYSTEM RESERVED INDEX SYSTEM RESERVED MODE SYSTEM SOFTWARE SYSTEM SOFTWARE 60Hz DEFAULTS FALSE TRUE SYSTEM SOFTWARE 620 VERSION SYSTEM SOFTWARE CHASSIS SYSTEM SOFTW
153. TEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS S8YSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS IFB ADJUST 115 006 SYSTEM RESERVED USE MISCELLANEOUS MODN INDEX SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS RESET SYSTEM RESERVED USE MISCELLANEOUS RESET VEC VARS TRUE SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE MISCELLANEOUS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM RESERVED USE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM RESERVED USE TERM V CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE TERM V CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE TERM CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE TERM CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE TERM CONTROL RESPNSE nTr10 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE CONTROL TV INT 50 00 SYSTEM RESERVED USE TERM CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE V CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED USE 5 FUNCTIONS SYSTEM RESERVED USE 5 FUNCTIONS SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE FUNCTIONS CURRI SYSTEM USE FUNCTIONS CURRI SYS
154. TERM CONTROL 100 RECFG SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TERM CONTROL 1 150 RECFG SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY TERM CONTROL i 300 RECFG SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TERM CONTROL 30009 RECFG SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TERM CONTROL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TERM V CONTROL SETUP PARAMETERS STOP RATES PROG STOP I LIM SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TERM V CONTROL TERM SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS TOTAL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY DIAGNOSTICS RESD SL SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY DIAGNOSTICS 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 8 Appendices Text SYSTEM RESERVED FALSE TRUE SYSTEM RESERVED SETUP PARAMETERS SYSTEM RESERVED SYSTEM RESERVED USE ONLY FIELD WK VARS TR SCALE 9 SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION SET UP LOCAL KEY SETUP PARAMETERS OP STATION SET UP SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TEST FUNCTIONS SYSTEM USE ONLY TEST FUNCTIONS NO 530000 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TEST FUNCTIONS IMPL E CNT 1 638000 SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TEST FUNCTIONS IMPULSE HEIGHT30000 SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED PWR LOSS CNTRL SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED PWR LOSS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED PWR LOSS CNT THRESHOLD SETUP PARAMETERS ADVAN
155. TERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS LOSS ACTIVE SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS OPERATORS OPERATORS 9 2 0 Appendices OPERATORS OPERATORS I O BLOCK OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS 0PERATORS OPERATORS I O BLOCK OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS OPERATORS I O BLOCK REF ENCODER REF ENCODER REF ENCODER SPEED LOOP REF ENCODER REF ENCODER SPEED LOOP SPEED LOOP SERIAL LINKS PORT P3 LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR DIAGRAM LOGIC LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR DIAGRAM LOGIC LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR LOGIC OPERATOR DIAGRAM LOGIC LENGTH MENU REF ENCODER LENGTH MENU LENGTH Sq LENGTH MENU LENGTH MENU LENGTH REF ENCODER LENGTH MENU LENGTH ADVANCED PWR LOSS CNT REF SPEED FILTER D IREF SPEED FILTERED RI ADVANCED ROTOR TEMP ADVANCED Tr COMP COLI SYSTEM RESERVED ENG USE ONLY TRACE TRACE INDEX SETUP PARAMETERS HOME OVERSHOOT LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS CALIBRATION ENCODER SUPPLY No Text SERIAL LINKS PORT P1 ERROR SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SYSTEM SOFTWARE SYSTEM SOFTWARE SETUP PARAMETERS
156. TION gt 0000 SERIAL UP TO ACTION gt 0000 SERIAL P3 BAUD RATE 300 600 1200 2400 48009 9600 6 5 5 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INFO SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O SYSTEM CONFIGURE ENABLE FALSE SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN SYSTEM CONFIGURE I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SYSTEM CONFIGURE SPEED LOOP ZERO SPEED Z S RAMP ACCEL S RAMP OVERSHOOT THRESH I O ANALOG INPUTS I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN I O ANALOG OUTPUTS I O A
157. TIVE P GAIN 675 10 00 PWR LOSS CNTRL aures ENABLE 639 FALSE flor s TRIP THRESHOLD 640 0 VOLTS vs CONTROL BAND 657 20 VOLTS E hul DECEL RATE 641 2 50 a oS v certe ACCEL RATE 644 0 50 fou quss TIME LIMIT 643 30 000 SECS fo eive ew PWR LOSS ACTIVE 766 FALSE M SPEED SETPOINTS E wires DIRECT SPT1 171 0 00 eis Sid dU DIRECT RATIO 172 0 1000 DIRECT SPT 173 100 00 DIRECT SPT 174 100 00 Tor PE ES DIRECT ENABLE 175 FALSE MAIN SPD SPT 176 0 00 lt 346 SPEED 177 100 00 5 MIN SPEED 178 100 00 5 SEQ RUN INPUT 49 0 00 5 hcic SEQ OUTPUT 50 0 00 fultus ZERO SPEED ec e ZERO SPD HYST 132 0 10 EE ZERO SPEED LEVEL 252 0 50 IN CA MEE AT ZERO SPEED 17 TRUE Sce a S E AT ZERO SETPOINT 18 TRUE cri ees AT STANDSTILL 19 TRUE fios TEST MODE Di ENABLE 647 FALSE fca e SPEED SETPOINT 1 648 5 00 SPEED SETPOINT 2 649 10 00 5 PERIOD 650 1000 mSECS ONU ES TOTAL SPD DMD 6 0 00 SPEED UNFIL 7 0 00 bti era SPEED FEEDBACK 11 0 00 Se vacates SPEED ERROR 8 0 00 5 ENCODER 51 0 RPM SPEED SETPOINT 48 0 00 SPEED LOOP TUNING SPD PROP GAIN Speed loop PI proportional gain adjustment A gain value of 1 00 is unity SPD INT T
158. TUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS PASSWORD BYPASS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS No Text SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS No Text SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS No Text SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS CONFIGURE DRIVE SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS SYSTEM CONFIGURE SETUP PARAMETERS ENG USE ONLY MISCELLANEOUS AUX I O AUX I 0O AUX START AUX 0 JOG AUX 0 ENABLE PASSWORD AUX 5 AUX I O JOG INPUT AUX 0 JOG JOG JOG SPEED 1 JOG JOG SPEED 2 REF ENCODER TORQUE LOOP JOG MODE RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER RAISE LOWER PRESET CURRENT FEEDBACK RESET VALUE RAMP RATE RAISE INPUT LOWER INPUT MIN VALUE MAX VALUE EXTERNAL RESET PRESET SELECT 1 PRESET SELECT 2 PRESET SELECT 3 INPUT PRESET INPUT PRESET INPUT PRESET INPUT PRESET INPUT
159. TUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 RATIO 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SIGN 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 2 SIGN 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SPT SUM SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 3 DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM DIVIDER SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 3 INPUT 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM INPUT 1 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 3 LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM RATIO SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 3 RATIO SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SIGN 0 SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM SIGN 1 1 1 T 1 4 1 1 14 Ass 1 1 15 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 P 2 2 2 2 Dye 3 3 3 33 32 9 3 35 3t SETUP PARAMETERS SETPOINT SUM 3 SPT SUM SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED 1 GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED ADAPTIVE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED ADAPTIVE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED PWR LOSS SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED PWR LOSS ACCEL RATE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP ADVANCED PWR LOSS CONTROLVOL BAND SETUP PARAMETERS DECEL RATE SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED ENABLFALSE FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS ADVANCED PWR 1034581 FALSE TRUE ACTIVE
160. UE SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED 2 SPEED ZERO SPD HYST SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED 2 SPEED ZERO SPEED LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP ACCEL O P SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP ACCELERATION SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP AT SPEED FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP AT SPEED LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP AUTO RESET FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP DECELERATION SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP ERROR THRESHOLD SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP EXTERNAL RESET FALSE TRUE SETUP PARAMETERS INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP JERK SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP JERK 1 2 SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP JERK 3 4 SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP JERK SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP OUTPUT SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP OVERSHOOT THRESH SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP QUENCH SETUP PARAMETERS S RAMP RESET VALUE SETUP PARAMETERS SYMMETRIC SETUP PARAMETERS RATES SETUP PARAMETERS RATES COAST STOP SETUP PARAMETERS RATES CONTACTOR DELAY SETUP PARAMETERS RATES FAST STOP LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS RATES FAST STOP TIME SETUP PARAMETERS RATES PILOT 590 MODE SETUP PARAMETERS RATES PRE START DELAY SETUP PARAMETERS RATES PROG STOP I LIM SETUP PARAMETERS RATES PROGRAM STOP SETUP PARAMETERS RATES READY DELAY SETUP PARAMETERS RATES RUN STOP LIMIT SETUP PARAMETERS RATES RUN STOP TIME SETUP PARAMETER
161. UE SE 000 VOLTS 000 VOLTS 000 VOLTS 000 VOLTS 000 VOLTS 000 VOLTS lI ooooooc FALSE FALSE FALSE 6 FALSE 38 FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE 45 0 00 0 0 5 6 0 0 00 0 00 8 0 1 0 0 1 1 lI oo de oo z 1541 1551 FALSE FALSE lt 0 00 lt 345 10 0 SECS 10 0 SECS 60 1 00 5 TRUE 62 FALSE 0 00 0 00 0 0 e ih ed a LOCAL KEY ENABLE 632 TRUE E START UP VALUES 503 Pag eth gress REV DIRECTION sate PROGRAM 505 ss ise deor manu se LOCAL 506 3 EE ace LOCAL RAMP 0 05 504 FALSE FALSE FALSE S RAMP ACCEL TIME DECEL TIME de S RAMP 516 Ri Saisie ce oe RAMP OUTPUT 509 AUX 5111 10 0 SECS 512 10 0 SECS ae oo o o AUX START 66 TRUE START 70 FALSE AUX JOG 67 TRUE lt 450 JOG INPUT 71 FALSE lt 451 Tr AUX ENABLE 68 TRUE ENABLE 72 FALSE lt 452 Ba REM SEQ ENABLE 791 SEQ 786 E T SEQ STATUS 787 REEERE JOG SPEED 1 75 JOG SPEED 2 76 MODE 80 FALSE JOG ACCEL RATE 113 JOG DECEL RATE 114 eue ete RAISE LOWER tae Sesto ae RESET VALUE 82 RAM
162. Y FIELDS 2 3 AND 4 YES OPTIONAL E D FILTERS AVAILABLE TO ASSIST USERS IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE EMC DIRECTIVE WILL THE E D PRODUCT NO BE INSTALLED ACCORDING TO THE PE INSTALLATION EMC CHARACTERISTICS GUIDELINES STATED IN MANUAL YES E TM EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES D STATED IN MANUAL THE E D MANUFACTURERS DECLARATION FOR EMC IS VALID FOR THE SPECIFIED MODULE WHEN INSTALLED CORRECTLY THE E D DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FOR EMC IS VALID FOR THE SPECIFIED ED MODULE EMC CE MARK CAN BE APPLIED TO E D MODULE TO GENERIC EMC STANDARDS NO EMC CE MARK APPLIED TO E D MODULE 50082 1 1992 AND prEN50082 2 1992 A GLOBAL EMC SOLUTION MAYBE ADVANTAGEOUS RELEVANT APPARATUS MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER INSTALLERS RESPONSIBILITY TO CONFORM WITH EMC DIRECTIVE E D EMC CHARACTERISTICS AND MANUFACTURERS DECLARATION MAY BE USED AS A BASIS IN THE OVERALL PRODCT JUSTIFICATION E D EUROTHERM DRIVES LIMITED 620 Vector Drive HA463584 The European Directives and the CE Mark 7 3 Consideration of EMC Environment When considering the relevant EMC emission and immunity standards it is important to distinguish between the following classes of EMC environments Residential supplied directly from public electricity supply RF emission EN55011 Class or 50081 1 1992 Immunity 50082
163. ace faults on the equipment The purpose of this chapter is to guide the user through the on board diagnosis and fault finding facilities using the MMI diagnostic and alarm display CHAPTER 7 EMC AND THE CE MARK This chapter sets out Eurotherm Drives Limited responsibilities to the recent European EMC low voltage and machinery Directives and explains how Eurotherm are assisting their customers in achieving conformance The north American requirements are also discussed CHAPTER 8 SERVICING This chapter provides the routine maintenance and repair procedures The purpose of this chapter is to assist returning the controller to service following a fault condition CHAPTER 9 APPENDICES Appendix A contains advanced tuning notes Appendix B contains MMI Listing Appendix C contains Tags by Number and Text String Cont 5 Cont 6 Contents Contents Page Chapter 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW INTRODUCTION e ee ou 1 1 Division of Information ener 1 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION J n ine ae eee teo ene aee 1 1 PRODUCT RANGE he nete eee 1 1 Optional 1 2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION 22 2212 0 0000 04000 1 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION reete eee ee eee e nen 1 3 Generali ers Qa A tics cede Aten peau e du 1 3 deze 1 3 Diagnostics and monitoring 1 3 oer ice ee
164. agraphs which include references for further details 620 VECTOR MENU LEVEL CONFIG DRIVE DIAGNOSTICS SETUP PARAMETERS PASSWORD ALARM STATUS MENUS PARAMETER SAVE SERIAL LINKS SYSTEM ENCODER LINES MAX SPEED RPM BASE FREQUENCY MOTOR VOLTAGE MOTOR RATING RMS NO OF POLES MAX SPEED RPM NAMEPLATE RPM ROTOR TIME CONST MAG CURRENT ENCODER SIGN START AUTOTUNE HEALTH WORD HEALTH STORE FIRST ALARM HEALTH INHIBIT ENTER PASSWORD CHANGE PASSWORD SOFTWARE CONFIG RESERVED 5703 MODE UDP XFR Tx P3 TAG LIST DUMP MMI Tx UDP XFR Rx P3 BAUD RATE RAMPS JOG INVERSE TIME STOP RATES ALARMS SPEED LOOP SETPOINT SUM 2 PRESET AUX I O RAISE LOWER Configure Drive The CONFIGURE DRIVE option provides a fast track to commissioning a new 620 Vector drive It contains all the parameters necessary for basic operation grouped together under one menu This will be
165. ains the motor protective earth connection The screen armour must be earthed at both ends by connecting it to both the motor frame and the entrance to the cubicle or gland box for wall mount ideally in 360 termination s via cable glands to meet the most stringent emission requirements Screen to earth connections via 360 bonding is 75 more effective than earthing via pigtails Note some motor gland boxes and conduit glands are made of plastic if this is the case then braid must be connected between the screen and the chassis in addition at the motor end ensure that the screen is electrically connected to the motor frame since some terminal boxes are insulated from the frame by gasket paint Often the screens are terminated on a power screen rail at the entrance to the enclosure using u clips to achieve a near 360 screen band The integrity of the screen must be maintained over the entire length of the cable between the enclosure and motor If the cable is broken to insert terminals contactors chokes fuses etc then the screen must be connected over the shortest possible distance Note some hazardous area installations may preclude direct earthing at both ends of the screen in this case earth the other end via a 1 UF 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 2 3 5 capacitor The motor protective earth should be connected to the drive module motor protective earth connection If a shielded cable is not avai
166. al case is for square networks where the number of series elements is the same as the number of parallel elements as in Figure 3 6 In such an array the total resistance is always the same as one resistor the power rating is the rating of one resistor multiplied by the number of resistors Resistor Voltage Ratings The resistor s must be specified for the maximum DC link voltage 800V for the 380 460V version 405V for the 208 240V version 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 1 6 Installation Procedure EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Introduction This section provides installation guidelines for drive modules and systems to maximise their Electro Magnetic Compatibility in their intended operating environment All installers must read this section and apply the advice which is relevant to their application Pass on this information to others as is appropriate All power drive systems have the potential to produce electrical emissions both radiated and conducted back into the AC supply This is due to the inherent operation of all drives by switching large voltages and currents rapidly in order to control the motor Because the drives internal control electronics operates continuously in very close proximity to the electrically noisy power switching elements drives are inherently immune to any additional external electrical noise Great care has been taken in the design and selection of suitable EMC filters to
167. al terminals are SELV i e protected by double insulation Class 2 The purpose of this protection is to allow safe connection to other low voltage equipment and is not designed to allow these terminals to be connected to any unisolated potential Ensure all wiring rated for highest system voltage NOTE Thermal sensors contained within the motor are to be double insulate WALL MOUNTING To maintain compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive standards VDE 0160 1994 EN50178 1998 only units supplied and fitted with the NEMA 1 top cover are to be mounted on the wall RCDs Compatible with Type B RCDs only Cont 4 How to Use this Manual This manual provides information to support the installation and operation of the 620 Vector Drive A description of each of the chapters is given here to assist in locating and using the information contained within the manual CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW This chapter contains a brief description of the drive including a technical specification of the equipment The purpose of this chapter is to familiarise the reader with the purpose and scope of the equipment CHAPTER 2 PRE INSTALLATION PLANNING This chapter contains a functional description of the equipment wiring information and a description of the signals on the input output terminals The purpose of this chapter is to allow the user to understand the function of the equipment and to assist in designing a particular installation conf
168. allation Planning INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS This section shows all the necessary wiring details for connecting up a 620 Vector series drive Figure 2 5 shows the minimum configuration required for basic operation of the Drives Figure 2 6 shows a full connection diagram to utilise all the features of the Drives All the 620 Vector Drives are wired similarly The main difference between the variants other than power rating and physical size is the capacity of the upstream circuit breaker MCB 1 in Figure 2 6 and the layout of the power terminals The MCB details are listed in Table 2 1 and the power terminals are shown in Figures 2 9 to 2 12 FILTER OPTIONAL M1 U M2 V M3 W OOOO a ul 5 m 29 h a i V 0 a p m eg a 425277 ET 55 ETE 9 0 gt D ao ED 5 9 4 i 2 gt 7 Uja 07 5E o Bo 8 5 o 2 aN 2 7 gt sug BLE IE gt 529 MAD ree lt XZ S o gt 2 8 e a 2 o lt E e a gt 2
169. alue and lock the set up parameters again EXAMPLE 3 A PREVIOUSLY SET PASSWORD 1 Access the ENTER PASSWORD menu 2 Use the up and down arrow keys to enter the existing password value 3 Leavethe ENTER PASSWORD menu and access the CHANGE PASSWORD menu 4 Use the up and down arrow keys to select a new password value 5 Leave the CHANGE PASSWORD menu and access the CLEAR PASSWORD menu 6 Press the M key to clear the password value and lock the set up parameters 7 Remember 10 use SAVE PARAMETERS to save the new password value in non volatile memory ALARM STATUS MMI ENTRIES ALARM STATUS Q e k em HEALTH STORE 203 0x0000 S Pees HEALTH word 217 0x0010 nose FIRST ALARM 218 0x0010 HEALTH INHIBIT 219 0x0000 MENUS MMI ENTRIES MENUS PE ER FULL MENUS 205 FALSE Lok MENU DELAY 206 0 DATA DELAY 207 50 PARAMETERS Full Menus If False the MMI will not display tags marked P or h PARAMETERS SAVE This menu is used to save all of the drive parameters in the non volatile memory The UP arrow as instructed on the second line of the MMI display UP TO ACTION to save the drive parameters 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 2 Function Blocks SYSTEM SOFTWARE INFO Diagnostic information about the current software and hardware build of the drive padece ied SOFTWARE INFO 620 VERSION 782 4 1 E vus P1 VERSION 226 1 1 CO PRO PRESENT 150 TRUE fous
170. and Commissioning 4 3 DOWN When in the menu structure pressing the DOWN key steps through the options or settings for the currently displayed menu option When you are stepping through text displays e g menu options the DOWN key steps in the opposite direction from the UP key If the current entry is connected to another tag then the source tag number will be displayed along with the current tag s number Numerical values are decremented by the DOWN key Pressing this key while in LOCAL MODE LOCAL LED illuminated decreases the speed reference The speed of the motor is shown on the display while the button is pressed as a percentage of the maximum speed The six command keys allow the user to start stop and jog the drive directly from the op station The following section identifies each key by its legend and describes its function The Up and Down Keys also take on command functions in Local mode LOCAL REMOTE This key toggles between the normal operating mode REMOTE and the LOCAL control mode It only works when the motor is stopped When in LOCAL MODE the LOCAL LED is illuminated and the MMI buttons START STOP JOG REVERSE UP and DOWN can be used to control the motor speed and direction Press the LOCAL button to return to REMOTE MODE the MMI will return to the last accessed place in the main menu PROG When in LOCAL MODE pressing the PROG button switches back to the main MMI menu At the point it was l
171. are Section Control with PID trim on speed demand The PID input is either load cell tension or dancer position feedback FEATURES 1 Independent adjustment of gain and time constants Additional first order filter F Functions P PI PD PID with without F individually selected Ratio and divider for scaling each input GU ops Independent positive and negative limits 6 Output scalar Trim BLOCK DIAGRAM PROP GAIN INTEGRAL TC RATIOT DERIVATIVE TC O P SCALER INPUT 1 D POS LIMIT DIVIDER Y Kp 1 sTi 1 sT P1 PID OUTPUT sTi 1 sTf RATIO2 NEG LIMIT R INPUT 2 D ENABLE DIVIDER2 INTEGRAL DEFEAT Figure 5 19 PID 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 2 9 MMI ENTRIES PID flv INPUT 545 0 00 Linked to 556 ENABLE 534 TRUE PROP GAIN 549 1 0 fessis INT TIME CONST 539 5 00 SECS INT DEFEAT 538 FALSE DERIVATIVE TC 531 0 000 SECS 535 0 100 SECS POSITIVE LIMIT 547 100 00 5 Peet ne NEGATIVE LIMIT 542 100 00 SCALER TRIM 543 1 0000 Sath sessq ERROR CALC f ei e INPUT 1 536 0 00 fs dedit INPUT 2 537 0 00 ae RATIO 1 550 1 0000 f ZQ yanu a RATIO 2 551 1 0000 fols E SIGN 1 601 POS f x es SIGN 2 602 POS fue ae ea DIVIDER 1 532 1 0000 DIVIDER 2
172. argin must be incorporated to ensure that the resistors are not overloaded The resistance of the resistor is an important factor Each of the 620 Vector drives has a specified minimum load resistance Under no circumstances must a resistor of lower value be used as this will cause serious damage to the electronic switch The minimum resistor values and the maximum permissible peak power dissipation for a maximum of 20 seconds are listed in Table 3 1 If the power dissipation is to be significantly less than half the maximum allowable a higher resistance value may be used if this is convenient up to a maximum of five times the minimum resistance A rule of thumb calculation for this is as follows Pmax 2x Ppk Maximum resistance Rmax Rmin x but note Rmax 5 x Rmin No damage will be caused if any resistance between this value and the minimum specified in Table 3 1 is used Always use a lower resistance rather than a higher resistance if the calculated value is not available 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 5 Series parallel Networks In order to obtain the necessary power rating it will usually be necessary to build up a series parallel network of resistors as shown in Figure 3 5 Each resistor Eurotherm CZ057146 56 ohms 220W continuous Resistors in parallel Resistors in series is the same as is the same as _ mm One resistor of 28 ohms One resistor of 112 ohms rated
173. ast accessed from REMOTE MODE while still remaining in LOCAL MODE This enables changes to be made to parameters not available in the LOCAL MODE menu This button has no function in REMOTE MODE FORWARD REVERSE When in LOCAL MODE the FORWARD REVERSE button changes the sign of the speed reference When you press this button the display changes to indicate the new direction of rotation When in JOG mode see below this key selects between the two jog speeds This button has no function in REMOTE MODE JOG When in LOCAL MODE pressing this button runs the motor at the speed set by the JOG SPEED parameters The motor only runs in jog mode while the button is pressed This button has no function in REMOTE MODE START When in LOCAL MODE pressing this button starts the motor running The motor will continue to run at the selected speed until the STOP button is pressed This button has no function in REMOTE MODE JOG and START require the inputs COAST STOP FAST STOP and ENABLE to be high before they will operate 620 Vector Drive HA463584 4 4 Setting up and Commissioning STOP When in LOCAL MODE pressing this button stops the motor if it is running While stopped the drive remembers the direction and speed at which the motor was running and will resume to those settings if the START button is pressed This button has no function in REMOTE MODE Summary of MMI Keys Goes down a level Goes up a level EITHE
174. ated emission limits of EN55011 1991 Class A when wall mounted to these instructions using the recommended EMC filter and screened motor control and signal cabling Products which meet the limits of Class A can be made to meet the more stringent limits of Class B by mounting inside an enclosure with 10 dB attenuation between 30 and 100 MHz which would typically be the attenuation provided by a metal cabinet with no aperture at a dimension greater than 0 15m and screening any control and signal cabling outside of the cubicle Minimise the length of unshielded cable inside the cubicle to prevent increased radiated emission A single point earthing policy as shown in Fig 3 11 is required The protective earth connection PE to the motor must run inside the screened cable between the motor and 620 drive module where it is to be connected to the protective earth terminal in the gland box or on the drive module note in accordance with EN60204 only one protective earth conductor is permitted at each earth terminal contacting point Local wiring regulations may require the protective earth connection of the motor to be connected locally but this will not cause shielding problems due to relatively high RF impedance of the local earth connection The EMC filter must be permanently earthed in accordance with recommendations and warnings in the section EMC Filters to Reduce Line Conducted Noise page 3 16 Encoder Connections and Recommendations
175. ated removed short circuited as applicable Due to the internal capacitors between phase and earth the DC voltage should be wound up slowly to prevent excessive earth current For similar reasons AC flash testing cannot be performed due to the excessive earth leakage current Repeated flash testing is not recommended as it may degrade the insulation EMC Responsibility of MANUFACTURERS SUPPLIERS INSTALLERS For end users of 620 Vector drive modules a correctly installed power drive system PDS created from the supplied 620 Vector drive will be compliant with the generic emission standards EN50081 1 1992 and EN50081 2 1994 and for immunity EN50082 1 1992 and prEN50082 2 1992 as previously indicated Manufacturers suppliers installers of relevant apparatus may use this compliance as a basis for their own justification of overall compliance with the EMC Directive If it is the responsibility of the manufacturer supplier installer to establish EMC conformity and to mark There are three methods of demonstrating conformity 1 Self certification to a relevant standard 2 Third party testing to a relevant standard 3 Writing a technical construction file stating the technical rationale as to why the relevant apparatus is compliant An EMC competent body must then assess this and issue a technical report or certificate to demonstrate compliance Upon demonstrating EMC compliance an EC Declaration of Conformity for the apparatus or mach
176. atings Control Circuit The following ratings relate to all 620 variants Supplies Reference Supplies for all analogue inputs 10V 0 1V 10 max 10V 0 1V 10mA max Supply for all digital inputs 24V 10 200 max This is in addition to the digital outputs Table 1 3 Reference Inputs Analogue I O Min load 3kO to Ov Resolution 12 bit 1 in 4096 12 bit 1 4096 sign Approx 2 5mV resolution Sample Rate Synchronous with block Synchronous with block diagram diagram Terminal C4 Direct 1 1mS 1 76mS for drive sizes 7 and upwards Current max Table 1 4 Analogue Interface Specification Digital Inputs Input voltage Nominal 24V DC Max 30V DC Synchronous with block diagram Threshold V low lt 6V DC Typical 12V DC Vin high gt 18V DC Table 1 5 Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Digital outputs are open circuit when Off The On specification is shown in Table 1 7 Short Circuit Duration Indefinite Table 1 6 Digital Outputs 620 Vector Drive HA463584 1 6 Product Overview Pilot Output Pilot output is an open collector output that is off while the drive is healthy The specification is shown in Table 1 7 Open Collector OV to 24V 50mA Current Sink Table 1 7 Pilot Output Encoder Inputs Input Voltage 30V to 30V differential Input Threshold Voltage AV 1V DIL 7 12 switch on 9V 1V DIL 7 12 switch off Input Curr
177. aywan sa SPEED SETPOINT 2 649 10 00 ENABLE 534 TRUE PERIOD 650 1000 mSECS 549 1 0 SPD DMD 6 0 00 INT TIME CONST 539 5 00 SECS UNFIL 7 0 00 INT DEFEAT 538 FALSE FEEDBACK 11 0 00 DERIVATIVE 531 0 000 SECS ERROR 8 0 00 Eis E FILTER TC 535 0 100 SECS ered tips she ENCODER 51 0 RPM f POSITIVE LIMIT 547 100 00 SPEED SETPOINT 48 0 00 f NEGATIVE LIMIT 542 100 00 AUTOTUNE SCALER TRIM 543 1 0000 PPS AUTOTUNE FLAG 482 FALSE f ERROR CALC Sau sd MAG I AUTOTUNE 483 TRUE J 936 0 00 no EE SET Tr RTD SPD 484 TRUE d ANPUT 2 537 0 00 5 AUTOCAL MAX RPM 629 30000 RPM 1 550 1 0000 SUUM SETPOINT SUM 1 Sas AN 22 554 1 0000 0 189 1 0000 f SIGN 1 601 POS RATIO 1 190 1 0000 f SIGN 2 602 POS dA SIGN 0 191 POS f DIVIDER 1 532 1 0000 SIGN 1 192 POS DIVIDER 2 5331 1 0000 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 Appendices fiu LIMIT 553 100 00 ERROR 500 0 00 PROFILER Tru weds MODE 541 0 MIN PROFILE GAIN 540 20 00 PROFILED GAIN 548 0 0 f
178. ce motor INCH RETARD As above in the other sense INCH RATE The number of counts to be trickled into the Position error accumulator every millisecond CALC REF POSTION ENABLE If enabled the reference encoder position is synthesised from INPUT it is assumed INPUT is demand velocity The position error may then be used with the PID to provide a speed correction and added to demanded velocity The primary purpose of this block is to improve the accuracy of open loop position moves INPUT Velocity input for position calculator OUTPUT Output diagnostic 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 2 8 Function Blocks SPEED Note This is only applicable to the 620Comm and 620L Calculates reference speed from the reference encoder Speed is normalised to 100 which equates to the maximum speed rpm parameter taking into account the number of lines on the reference encoder REFSPEED Speed diagnostic calculated from Reference encoder MAX SPEED RPM 100 for reference encoder ENCODER LINES Number of lines on the reference encoder used for the calculation of reference speed SCALED REF SPEED If TRUE reference speed is scaled by REF SCALE REF SCALE B PID The PID Block allows the drive to be used in applications where a trim is required from an external loop The PID input can be load cell tension dancer position or any other transducer feedback such as pressure flow etc The most commonly encountered applications in web transfer and winding
179. cessing is synchronous with the speed loop every 1 1 ms and can be used by an external trim loop positioning systems etc When not in use this should be disabled 620 Vector Drive HA463584 DIRECT SPT MAX DIRECT SPT MIN DIRECT ENABLE MAIN SPD SPT MAX SPEED MIN SPEED ZERO SPEED ZERO SPD HYST ZERO SPEED LEVEL AT ZERO SPEED AT ZERO SETPOINT AT STANDSTILL TEST MODE ENABLE SPEED SETPOINT 1 Function Blocks 5 21 Limits the range of the scaled Direct input Disables the processing of analogue input C4 this must be enabled to make use of this feature The Direct setpoint is automatically disabled while the stop ramps are active and in Local mode This is the main setpoint from the block diagram These are intended to prevent the speed setpoint from going negative and not to create an offset Offsets may be generated elsewhere probably before the system ramp Hysterises level for zero speed detection Zero speed threshold Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic If enabled the speed loop setpoint is defeated and the setpoint is obtained alternately from SPEED SETPOINT 1 and SPEED SETPOINT 2 at a rate determined by PERIOD The test mode may be used to commission the PI for the speed loop Speed test mode setpoint 1 SPEED SETPOINT 2 Speed test mode setpoint 2 PERIOD Rate at which the test cycle operates at DIAGNOSTICS TOTAL SPD DMD Diagnostic SPEED FEEDBACK Diagnostic SPEED ERROR Diagnostic EN
180. changes in speed demand or direction To check this use the and buttons to increase the speed to about double the first figure and then use the button to change the direction of rotation If it accelerates and changes direction smoothly this confirms that the encoder sign is set correctly 5 Ifthe ENCODER SIGN is incorrect the motor will rotate in a jerky and or noisy manner Alternatively it may rotate smoothly at a very low speed but not respond to changes in speed demand or direction In either case the encoder sign must be changed Paragraph 7 describes how to change the encoder sign 6 Ifthe motor rotates in the wrong direction press to stop the motor then power down the entire drive assembly wait 3 minutes for the DC Link capacitors to discharge then swap motor drive cables M1 and M2 Re start the Initial Setup procedure from step 1 The encoder sign will have been changed by the change in motor direction as described in step 4 620 Vector Drive HA463584 4 1 Setting up Commissioning 7 Press to stop the motor then press to put the drive back into REMOTE MODE 8 Ifthe ENCODER SIGN needs changing go into the CONFIGURE DRIVE menu and select ENCODER SIGN then press Use the and buttons to set the ENCODER SIGN parameter to the other setting Press 9 This completes the initial part of the setting up phase At this point the motor is running under control but it is not optimised for smooth efficient run
181. coder It offers the user great system flexibility allowing easy integration into various control schemes The plain language Man Machine Interface MMI greatly simplifies setting up and commissioning the 620 Vector A simplified block diagram of a 620 is shown in Figure 2 13 This illustrates the basic internal arrangement of the drive with the circuitry split between the control circuits and power circuits The control circuits are common to all types of the 620 Vector Drive Chassis types 5 and 7 use a slightly different power circuit from types 4 and 6 The general principles of operation remain the same however Control Circuits and Software The control circuits and software element contain the intelligence of the 620 Vector series They comprise a sophisticated microprocessor system with digital and analogue inputs and outputs the MMI and circuits to interface between the microprocessor and the inverter circuits Speed feedback signals from the motor shaft encoder are processed by the microprocessor to determine the rotational speed of the shaft An PI algorithm within the software uses this information to produce varying gate drive signals to the inverter circuits These signals cause the inverter to output the required voltage and frequency for a particular motor speed Analogue inputs to the microprocessor are digitised and can be used to set parameters such as speed Digital inputs to the microprocessor signal various commands and
182. contains the information required to set up a motor drive system which automatically tunes itself to the motor and provides control of speed ramp up and down times and similar functions The 620 Vector series provides a further host of sophisticated programming options as standard GENERAL DESCRIPTION The 620 Vector drive allows high performance speed control of AC asynchronous induction motors fitted with an encoder It is available with a range of power ratings in three variants 620STD STANDARD for use in systems incorporating analogue setpoints and logic control systems 620COM As above with the addition of a Serial port for use in Eurotherm Drives serial protocols and a reference encoder input for phase control applications 620L As above with the addition of a Link co processor LINK fibre optic ports for use in Eurotherm Drives LINK fibre optic based networks This drive is programmed using ConfigEd Release 4 0 available and documented separately This manual only covers the 620Std and the hardware software differences for the 620 For more information on the 620L refer to Link documentation PRODUCT RANGE The 620 is available in four chassis types as follows CHASSIS POWER 208 to 240 volts POWER 380 to 460 volts 4 0 75 4 0kW 0 75 7 5kW 5 55 7 5kW 0 15 0kW TYPE 6 11 18kW 0 37 0kW 2 0 0 132kW 1 8 TYPE 7 2 37kW 5 75 0kw 9 WPE 9 LE 160 200kW Eases
183. ctual current with an oscilloscope on the diagnostic test pin See diagram 9 1 for the location of the two current feedback signals If the current loop gain is correct or too low the current feedback should follow the square wave current demand in a smooth controlled manner with no overshoot When it has reached the new level it should settle down to a smooth waveform with a small amount of ripple As the gain is increased i e the number in gain is decreased the current will follow the demand with less delay As the gain is increased further i e the number in gain is decreased further the point will be reached where the ripple in the steady state when it has reached its new level will suddenly increase When this happens the gain should be reduced until the ripple drops back to the low level The aim is to get the current to follow the demand with minimum delay while ensuring the steady state ripple remains at a minimum 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Diagnostic Test Pins Diagnostic test point scaling Feedback 100 1 59v peek Fok X X X 13 Fok Peek Diag X X Ov X Figure 9 1 Demand 220 5v peek Centred on 5v Diagnostic test points These are of two types e Analogue current control diagnostics e Peek memory location diagnostic Current control diagnostics The current control loop has two channels here called 1 and 3 for historical reasons Appendices 9 3
184. d 3 Save Command 13 is a write only parameter used to save the configuration and product code in non volatile memory The following table lists the valid values for the request Description Reset Command Acknowledges clears any previous save error Saves Configuration to drive s non volatile memory Save State 4 Save State 4 is a read only parameter used to determine the progress of a non volatile saving operation The following table lists the valid values for the response Description Idle Saving Failed TAG ACCESS All user parameters are accessible using a communications mnemonic derived from the tag number PARAMETER MAPPING The algorithm to convert between tag number and 2 character mnemonics is as follows int 36 TagNo m 36 if m 9 then char 1 a m 10 07 m mE t CH H II if n gt 9 then char 2 a n 10 char 2 0 n The algorithm generates mnemonics containing only the characters 0 to 9 and a to z 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 5 2 Function Blocks ENCODING The following table summarises the parameter types and their encoding Description Encoding Comments Boolean FALSE gt 00 Will accept gt 0 and gt 1 TRUE gt 01 16 bit Bit string gt 0000 to gt FFFF Will accept leading zero suppression except gt 0 16 bit Signed Integer XXXXX to Leading zeroes suppressed upto digit
185. d have adjustable trip amplitude and time characteristics to prevent nuisance tripping on initial power connection RCDs used with 620 drive modules and other similar equipment are not suitable for personnel protection Another means of providing personal safety must be provided for see EN50178 VDE01060 Minimising Radiated Emissions All 620 drive modules can be made to comply with the most stringent radiated emission limits of EN55011 1991 Class B by simply mounting inside an enclosure with 10 dB attenuation between 30 and 100 MHz which would typically be the attenuation provided by a metal cabinet with no aperture greater than 0 15m and screening any control and signal cabling outside of the enclosure The control and signal cables should be terminated at the entrance to the enclosure Outside of an enclosure wall mount all 620 drive modules will meet the Class A requirements with screening of the signal and control cables Inside the enclosure the radiated magnetic and electric fields will be high due to proximity and any components fitted inside the enclosure must be sufficiently immune Remember that the EN55011 radiated emission measurements are made between 30 MHz and 1 GHz in the far field at a distance of between 10m and 30 m No limits are specified lower than 30 MHz or in close proximity Emissions from individual components tend to be additive The cable between the enclosure and the motor must be screened or armoured and also cont
186. d in the controller by means of the thermal device in the motor winding This protection cannot be evaluated by UL hence it is the responsibility of the installer and or the local inspector to determine whether the overload protection is in compliance with the National Electrical Code or Local Code requirements Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection Requirements Model 620 Type 4 Series UL Listed JDDZ non renewable cartridge fuses or UL Listed renewable cartridge fuses rated 300Vac or 600Vac as appropriate depending on the rated input voltage of the drive must be installed upstream of the drive For fuse current ratings see Chapter Electrical Ratings Power Circuit Model 620 Type 5 and 6 Series UL Recognized Component JFHR2 semiconductor fuses must be installed upstream of the drive For fuse current ratings see Chapter 1 Electrical Ratings Power Circuit Refer to Table 1 16 below for recommended semiconductor fuse manufacturer and model numbers Fuse Current Rating Bussmann Model No 170M3808 170M3809 170M3810 170M3812 170M3813 Table 1 16 Bussmann International Fuses Rated 660Vac Model 620 Type 7 Series These devices are provided with solid state short circuit output protection Branch circuit protection should be provided as specified in the National Electrical Code NEC NFPA 70 Short Circuit Ratings Model 620 Type 4 5 6 Series Suitable for use on a circuit capable of
187. delivering not more than 5000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes 240 460V maximum Model 620 Type 7 Series Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the value shown in Table 1 17 RMS Symmetrical Amperes the value of rated voltage shown in Table 1 17 V maximum Output Rating kW Rated Voltage V Short Circuit Rating RMS Symmetrical Amperes 22 37 208 240 5 000 45 75 380 460 10 000 Table 1 17 Field Wiring Temperature Rating Model 620 Type 4 5 6 Series Use 60 C copper conductors only Model 620 Type 7 Series Use 75 C copper conductors only Motor Base Frequency The motor base frequency rating is 240Hz maximum Operating Ambient Temperature For operating ambient temperature range see Electrical Ratings Power Circuit on page 1 4 Environmental Rating Model 620 Type 4 5 6 7 Series with a Product Code Block IV designation xx2x are suitable for direct wall mounting as they have a Type Enclosure rating 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Product Overview 1 1 In order to preserve this enclosure rating it is important to maintain the environmental integrity of the enclosure The installer must provide correct Type closures for all unused clearance knockout holes within the drive glandbox Additionally in order to preserve the Type 1 Enclosure rating for 620 Type 7 models the installer must ensure that the blanking plates are fitted to the ventila
188. described under Setup Step 4 later in this chapter Diagnostics The DIAGNOSTIC option provides the user with access to read only displays of the various drive status CALIBRATION CURRENT LOOP SETPOINT SUM 1 SETPOINT SUM 3 Figure 4 3 Main Menu Options parameters Refer to Chapter 5 for further details Set up Parameters The SETUP PARAMETERS option provides the user with the facility to adjust and set a large number of drive parameters Refer to SETUP PARAMETERS in this chapter for further details Password The PASSWORD option allows the user to protect the setup parameters from being changed by an unauthorised user Procedures for setting and changing passwords are included in PASSWORD in this chapter Alarms The ALARMS option provides access to the last alarm message If the drive trips the MMI display immediately shows an alarm message indicating the reason for the trip This message can be cleared using the ESCAPE key but can be re displayed via the ALARMS menu Possible alarm messages are explained in Chapter 5 Menus The MENUS option allows the user to select the language in which the text appears Parameter Save The PARAMETER SAVE option enables the user to store the setup parameters after adjustment Serial Links The SERIAL LINKS option allows access to the serial link setup parameters which are used to configure the RS232 port P3 fitted as standa
189. ds Drive size Max Brake Current Minimum Brake 750Vdc Resistance Size 8 0900 220A 3 40 ohms Size 8 1100 264A 2 84 ohms Size 8 1320 300A 2 50 ohms Size 9 1600 360A 2 00 ohms Size 9 1800 440A 1 70 ohms Size 9 2000 450A 1 60 ohms Size 10 2500 525A 1 43 ohms Size 10 2800 675A 1 11 ohms Brake Resistor Selection Further notes There are several criteria which must be fulfilled when selecting a braking resistor for safe and proper operation These include peak and average power dissipation resistance and voltage rating This section describes how to select the right resistor for the application When the motor is decelerating a load the amount of power it creates is determined by the inertia of the load and the time the change in speed takes The rate of change is determined by the MMI parameter RAMP DOWN TIME Calculating Power Dissipation The power dissipation of the resistor needs to be calculated for both peak and average power The relationship between these two figures is shown in Figure 3 4 Power Ramp down time Motor running or stopped Peak Motor decelerating load power being fed back into inverter Average power Time Cycle time _ tS Figure 3 4 Peak and Average power 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 4 Installation Procedure The peak power dissipation depends on the change in motor rotational speed how quickly the change is achieved and the inertia
190. e VALUE OP 3 DEST 711 Esai VALUE OP 4 DEST 718 LOGIC OP 1 DEST 725 LOGIC OP 2 DEST 732 MEE LOGIC OP 3 DEST 739 Ele LOGIC OP 4 DEST 746 620 Vector Drive HA463584 176 371 372 Function Blocks 5 6 5 68 Function Blocks INTERNAL LINKS MMI ENTRIES ful INTERNAL LINK 1 flf k LINK 1 focus LINK 2 LINK 2 LINK 3 fugere LINK 3 LINK 4 filled LINK 4 fuge LINK 5 fob s 3 LINK 5 fuv y LINK 6 fu sudes LINK 6 LINK 7 LINK 7 fu y LINK 8 fills es LINK 8 fig sx LINK 9 LINK 9 Fetes ie was LINK 10 f sees LINK 10 LINK 11 fugere LINK 11 LINK 12 LINK 12 LINK 13 LINK 13 LINK 14 Eu sudes LINK 14 LINK 15 folu LINK 15 f u ab syz LINK 16 hrs LINK 16 LINKS SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 00000000 000000000000000 The internal links are an extension of the drive s reconfigurability
191. e following alternatives a Using copper protective earth conductor of at least 10 mm or b Installing a second conductor in parallel with the protective conductor to a separate protective earth terminal on the filter or inverter The conductor on its own shall meet the requirements for a protective earth conductor Thermal performance of the EMC filter is only guaranteed up to a switching frequency of 6k Hz type 4 and 5 and 3kHz type 6 and 7 and maximum equivalent cable length of 150 m Refer to the following section regarding safety considerations with earth fault detection systems Interaction With Earth fault Monitoring Systems and Safety Considerations Due to the EMC filter internal capacitors between phase and earth on initial connection of the AC supply a pulse of current will flow in the earth This has been minimised in the recommended EMC filters but may still trip out any RCD Resident Current Detector in the earth system In addition high frequency and DC components of earth leakage currents will flow under normal operating conditions Under certain fault conditions larger DC protective earth currents may flow The protective function of some RCDs cannot be guaranteed under such operating conditions Eurotherm Drives do not recommend the use of RCDs but where their use is mandatory they should be capable of correct operation with DC and AC protective earth currents such as type B RCDs as in amendment 2 of IEC755 an
192. e host to receive an ASCII file Ensure the host s serial port is set up first Save the 620 s settings using the Parameter Save feature This ensures the Dump matches the drive settings Set the P3 MODE to DISABLED Get the host ready to receive a file use the file extension MMI to differentiate it from UDP format files Start downloading on 620 by selecting DUMP MMI 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 4 7 The file ends in a ctrl z some packages this automatically closes the file If this is not case when 620 says it has finished and the host has stopped scrolling text close the file by hand 8 file can now be treated like any normal file UDP DOWNLOAD UDP XFER TX This is the transfer of parameters from the 620 to a host computer This information fully describes the 620 s settings in a binary format The listing is of the drive s settings currently held in EEprom i e those that have been saved 1 Connect the 620 to the host using the appropriate lead 2 Using a standard communications package prepare the host to receive an ASCII file Ensure the host s serial port is set up first Save the 620 s settings using the Parameter Save feature This ensures the UDP file matches the drive settings Set the P3 MODE to DISABLED Get the host ready to receive a file use the file extension UDP to differentiate it from MMI format files Start downloading on the 620 by se
193. e is automatically set to the correct value During MMI Download this is set to Busy P3 BAUD RATE Sets baud rate for P3 serial port 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 Baud rates higher than 9600 may become unreliable with a PC FILE TRANSFER MMI ENTRIES DUMP MMI TX Starts transmission of MMI Text file UDP XFER TX Starts transmission of UDP binary file UDP XFER RX Starts reception of UDP binary file SUMMARY The P3 port can be used to transfer an ASCII representation of the drive s settings between a 620 and a host computer The transfer uses simple ASCII file structure and XON XOFF protocol This is provided by most communications packages Host computers tested include IBM PC XT and AT running both Windows MS DOS and many more Transferring data from the 620 to a host computer is defined as downloading TX whereas transferring data from a host computer to the 620 is defined as uploading RX COMMUNICATION PORT SET UP 9600 Baud configurable from MMI 1 stop bit fixed No parity fixed 8 bits fixed XON XOFF handshaking fixed DUMP This is the transfer of the MMI description from the 620 to a host computer This information fully documents the 620 s settings in a textual format that is clear and easy to read The listing is of the drive s current settings not the settings held in EEprom 1 Connect the 620 to the host using the appropriate lead 2 Using a standard communications package prepare th
194. e port operates RS232 compatible signal levels which the 5703 converts to light for fibre optic transmission and from fibre optic to RS232 for reception 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 5 HARDWARE The 5703 are housed in a DIN rail mounted boxes and are provided with a ribbon cable to connect it to the P3 port While cable is of a fixed maximum length of 400mm to limit transmission errors the primary unit to unit interconnection is intended to be achieved by a fibre optic cable The 5703 unit itself is simply an electric signal to light converter and as such does not alter the signal in any way This is achieved within the software of the 620 converter The 5703 is fitted with one fibre optic receiver and two fibre optic transmitters The receiver has a fixed function to receive data from the preceding unit while one of the transmitters sends data to the following unit The additional transmitter can be used either to re transmit the incoming signal or provide a second transmission of the output signal giving the unit wide functionality When the link is in the normal right hand position assuming the board is mounted with the fibre optics downward the second transmitter repeats the output signal In the left hand position it repeats the input signal Input X Ratio 1 Ratio 1 100 Output x sign limit The 5703 can be configured to point to any relevant parameter in the block diagram
195. e provided the motor is a standard type whose rating is reasonably close to the rating of the drive See Appendix A Current Loop Gain Rotor temperature input this value is used to calculate a rotor time constant compensation value The value of rotor temperature must either be calculated externally of measured directly using an analogue input Sets the range of the rotor time constant compensation value from cold to hot Cold in this context is ROTOR TEMP 0 Diagnostic These limits the torque to the motor not the current The Current to the motor is made up of two component a Torque producing component Iq and a Field producing component The vector sum of these to is motor current 200 TORQUE LIMITS Although the limits have the range 200 this is only of use if the stack is capable of providing the extra current required Stacks are rated for 150 current as standard the current is clamped to 150 of stack RMS current by the Ixt function block POS TORQUE LIMIT NEG TORQUE LIMIT MAIN TORQUE LIMIT SYMMETRIC TQ LIMIT Positive Torque Limit see over page Negative Torque Limit see over page Main Torque Limit see over page Selects whether the negative limit is used or not 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 Symmetric Limits Main Torque Lim Pos Torque Lim as Speed Loop Torque Demand Aux Torque Demand Fig
196. e switch is OFF The drive furthest from the host should have switch 2 ON all other drive should switch 2 in the OFF position Switches 3 and 4 are only significant on 620 Link versions of the drive which are equipped with fibre optic communications facilities The switches control the transmitter output power as follows Switch 5 is used to test the transmit output power by turning the transmitter permanently ON when the switch is ON In this mode a light meter can be used to check that the received power at the far end of the optical fibre is within limits The switch must be OFF in the normal operation Table 2 3 Transmitter Power DIP Switches 2 4 wire tc 4 Wire RS 485 ff 2 Wire RS 485 Not Supported TX Power Swich4 5 5 Feedback Encoder Swich7 Swich8 Switch 9 9v Input Threshold 4vt1 Input Threshold Reference Encoder PY Switch 10 Switch 11 Switch 12 1 Input Threshold 4v 1 Input Threshold Switch 6 is not used Switches 7 to 9 control the threshold sensitivity for the feedback encoder switch 7 controls the A input switch 8 the B input and 9 the Z input Switches 10 to 12 control threshold sensitivity for the reference encoder optional switch 10 controls the sensitivity for the A input switch 11 the B input and 12 the Z input When the switches are set ON threshold sensitivity is 4V 1V When the switches are set to OFF threshold sensitivity is OV
197. ected operation on the inputs 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 3 8 Function Blocks FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The OUTPUT is generated from the INPUTS according to the operation type selected The output is always limited to be within the range 300 00 to 300 00 Operation Description IF C A If INPUT C is not zero the OUTPUT is minus INPUT A otherwise the OUTPUT is the same as INPUT A ABS A B C The OUTPUT is set to the absolute value of INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C SWITCH A B AP If INPUT C is zero the OUTPUT is OUTPUT set to INPUT A otherwise the output is set to INPUT B A B C The OUTPUT is set to INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C The algorithm compensates for the remainder term A B C The OUTPUT is set to INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C A B C The OUTPUT is set to INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C lt lt CNPUTA a The OUTPUT is set to the value of INPUT A limited to between a CINPUTB maximum value of INPUT C and a INPUTC minimum value of INPUT B If INPUT B is greater than INPUT C the output is undefined CINPUT A The OUTPUT is TRUE if INPUT A Ri greaterthan INPUT s 15 CINPUTC J if INPUT A is less than INPUT B INPUT Otherwise the OUTPUT is unchanged In this way the block acts as a simple comparator with a comparison level of INPUT B and a hysteresis band equal to INPUT C b The OUTPUT is TRUE if INPUT A is grea
198. ed brake is controlled by the motor terminal voltage as follows a Atrest the motor is braked b When the motor is energised an axial component of the magnetic field due to the conical air gap overcomes the force of the brake spring and draws the rotor into the stator This axial displacement releases the brake and allows the motor to accelerate like a normal induction motor c When the motor is de energised the magnetic field collapses and the brake spring displaces the rotor pushing the brake disc against the braking surface d Inverters can be used to control the speed of conical rotor brake motors since the drive maintains the motor magnetic field constant over the speed range Note These motors may be unsuitable for operation above base speed Using Line Chokes Line chokes are not required to limit input current to Eurotherm Drives inverters The purpose of these chokes is to reduce the ripple current in the DC Link capacitors 620s up to 4kW do not require a choke From 5 5kW upwards the choke is fitted inside the drive package Line chokes may be used to reduce the harmonic content of the supply current where this is particular requirement of the application Using Motor Chokes Installations with motor cable runs in excess of 50m may suffer from nuisance overcurrent trips This is due to the capacitance of the cable causing current spikes to be drawn from the Inverter output A choke may be fitted in the Inverter output whic
199. ed to accept the M5 diameter bolt fitted and the conductor size selected The single incoming protective conductor shall be of 10mm cross section minimum for permanent earthing in Europe connected to the terminal marked PE as shown in the drawing below whilst the motor protective conductor shall be connected to the remaining earth terminal within the gland box MOTOR PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR TERMINAL GRD GLAND BOX DIRECT WALL MOUNTING PE GRD CONNECTIONS 620 TYPES 4 amp 5 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 8 Installation Procedure MODEL 620 TYPE 6 AND TYPE 7 SERIES The protective earthing arrangements for these models consist of two green yellow coloured terminal blocks located as part of the power terminal array as shown in the accompanying drawings The incoming protective conductor of suitable size shall be connected to the terminal marked PE as shown in the drawing below whilst an adequately rated motor protective conductor shall be connected to the remaining earth terminal block The incoming protective earth conductor will be gt 10mm in cross section so the drives will be permanently earthed for Europe Sg PE GRD CUBICLE AND WALL MOUNTING PE GRD CONNECTIONS 620 TYPE 6 MOTOR PROTECTIVE TERMINAL GRD GLAND BOX SUPPLY PE GRD GLAND BOX MOTOR PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR TERMINAL GRD CUBICLE AND WALL MOUNTING PE GRD CONNECTIONS 620 TYPE 7 620 Vector Drive HA463584
200. eed alarm is generated Disables the 5703 alarm This only applies for 5703 slaves if enabled the drive will trip if it stops receiving valid 5703 messages from its master Delay before the speed feedback alarm is triggered The value of speed error below which the alarm is automatically inhibited Disables the speed feedback trip This is necessary if the drive is to operate in a mode where there is a speed error for example a drive operating in torque control Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic she ENCODER LINES 131 2048 id Aue RON ENCODER SUPPLY 774 50 pubis NES MAX SPEED RPM 130 1500 RPM BASE FREQUENCY 448 50 0 Hz series Suede ges MOTOR VOLTS 486 415 VOLTS MOTOR RATING RMS 134 1 0 AMPS NO OF POLES 399 4 NAMEPLATE RPM 135 1440 RPM PARAMETERS ENCODER LINES ENCODER SUPPLY MAX SPEED RPM BASE FREQUENCY MOTOR VOLTS MOTOR RATING RMS NO OF POLES NAMEPLATE RPM The exact number of lines on the encoder Failure to enter this value correctly will cause loss of torque and incorrect results from the Autotune Sets the encode supply voltage the actual value should read with a Multi meter The voltage range is approximately 10 to 20volts with 50 being 10v Motor top speed setting equates to 100 setpoint This may be adjusted to suit your process Base speed of the m
201. ent 10mA 3mA Maximum Input Frequency 250kHz on each of A and MaxSpeedRPM 60 Table 1 8 Control Terminal Specifications MaxFreq NoOfLines Encoder Supply Output Output Voltage 10 21V 0 to 200mA load 16V 1V Recommended load The Output Voltage may be set by altering the variable Setup Parameters Calibration Encoder Supply Recommended Load Current 50 200mA Table 1 9 Encoder Supply Output Specifications Serial Interface Voltage Levels RS 485 Isolation from other terminals Max withstand voltage to any other control 30v RMS terminal Table 1 10 Encoder Supply Output Specifications 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Product Overview 1 Mechanical Details The mechanical details of all the 620 vector series controllers are shown in Tables 1 11 to 1 14 The general layout of the cases is shown in Chapter 3 620 TYPE 4 POWER TERMINATIONS 5 slotted screws Tightening torque 2 5Nm 22 1lb in 1 8lb ft EARTH GROUND Gland box not fitted 2 x M4 bolt and washer tightening TERMINATOR torque 1 3Nm 11 5lb in 0 91 and M5 slotted screw and washer tightening torque 2 5Nm 22 1lb in 1 8lb ft Gland box fitted 2 x M5 stud nut and washer tightening toque 2 5Nm 22 1 b in 1 8lb ft and M5 slotted screw and washer tightening torque 2 5Nm 22 1lb in 1 8lb ft CONTROL TERMINATIONS Removable screw connectors for 0 75mm wire Terminals will accept up to 3 3mm wire 1
202. equipment placed closer to the drive system than this will see larger magnitude fields particularly very close to the drive No magnetic electric field sensitive equipment should be placed within 0 25m of the following parts of a drive system 620 Drive module EMC output filters Input or output chokes transformers Cable between 620 Frequency Inverter and Motor even when screened armoured Connections to external braking chopper and resistor even when screened armoured AC DC brushed motors due to commutation DC link connections even when screened armoured Relays and contactors even if they are suppressed Often the coupling between electrically noisy and sensitive cables is a problem This can be minimised by separating parallel runs by at least 0 25m and minimising the length of parallel runs For long parallel runs 210 m the separation should be increased proportionally For example if the parallel runs were 50 m then the separation would be 50 10 x 0 25 m 1 25 m In addition the coupling between two cables which must cross is minimised if they cross over at 90 Hence sensitive cables should cross the cables to the motor DC link and braking chopper circuit at 90 and should never be run close to them or in parallel for any great length Never run supply DC link or motor cables in the same bundle as the signal control and feedback cables even if they are screened From experience the following equip
203. erminals GROUND TERMINATIONS Compact high current terminal blocks Terminals accommodate wire range 33 6 107 2mm 2 4 0 AWG Tightening torque 20Nm 175lb in 14 6lb ft D C interconnection terminals DC DC Compact high current terminal blocks Terminals accommodate wire range 33 6 152mm 2AWG 300kcmil MCM Tightening torque 30 5Nm 2701 22 5lb ft Earth ground D Compact high current terminal blocks Terminals accommodate wire range 33 6 107 2mm 2 4 0 AWG tightening torque 22 6Nm 200lb in 16 715 CONTROL TERMINATIONS Removable screw connectors for 0 75mm wire Terminals will accept up to 3 3mm wire 12 AWG Tightening torque 0 56 0 79Nm 5 7lb in 0 42 0 581lb ft Spring terminal connectors Terminals will accept up to 0 8mm wire 18 AWG Table 1 14 620 type 7 mechanical details ENCLOSURE IP20 as standard to be built into a suitable cubicle IP40 with UL Type 1 top cover Type 4 5 6 and 7 only suitable for wall mounting in Europe EMC Specification Refer to Chapter 7 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Product Overview 9 HIGH POWER AC types 8 9 and 10 HPAC Product Manual HA463284 details the technical specification of these builds the following is for Electrical Ratings Power Circuits 620 Constant Torque information only Product Code Block 2 280 Nominal Motor Power kW 380V 90 110 132 160 180 200 250 280 Nominal Motor Power kW 415 440V 315
204. es 2 2 tte tI endete 6 5 AUTOTUNE Errors ARA LA AS A et t cL ere E E LEUR RE 6 6 ALARMS ENIM MIU MIN MI MINI 6 7 Cont 11 Contents Contents Page Chapter 7 THE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES AND THE CE MARK 7 1 EMG DIRECTIVE 7 1 CE EMG Responsibility 3 rrr n 04 7 1 Consideration of EMC 7 3 mr Pes cepe Deere Des epe De Td 7 4 Filter Installations 7 4 Specification of Achievable EMC Emission and Immunity 7 4 EMC Responsibility of MANUFACTURERS SUPPLIERS INSTALLERS 7 5 Eurotherm 7 5 EC Declaration of Conformity for 7 6 Manufacturers EMC Declaration 7 7 Machinery Directive tara aa e EAE ERE E EORR ERE Re PA ER 7 8 EC Declaration of Conformity for Electrical Sofety 7 9 Chapter 8 SERVICING ROUTINE 9 8 3 REPAIR 8 3 RETURNED 8 3 EUROTHERM DRIVES COMPANIES r arao irinna iraa aa Aa aa AAE RA RERA 8 4 OVERSEAS COMPANIE Srann a saa A 8 4 Chapter 9 APPENDICES p 9 1 Brake Motors ta 9 1 Using Line Chok s teret aaa
205. est ars INPUT fos pet ane OFFSET Ern a MODULUS INVERT pM EOM asss SOURCE TAG cnn DIGOUT 3 Bon ote ake THRESHOLD gt INPUT ay atu OFFSET MODULUS INVERT jn SOURCE TAG 292 324 321 293 327 294 296 325 322 297 328 298 300 326 323 301 329 302 0 00 5 0 01 5 0 00 5 FALSE FALSE 17 0 00 0 01 0 00 FALSE FALSE 12 0 00 0 00 0 00 TRUE FALSE 559 DIGOUT 1 E6 DIGOUT 2 E7 AND DIGOUT 3 E8 Threshold which the must exceed to set output TRUE THRESHOLD gt INPUT OFFSET MODULUS INVERT SOURCE TAG CONFIGURE 5703 DIAGNOSTIC Offset Output set true for absolute or modulus of N value Select inverted output Source TAG of used to set output See also page 5 56 Setpoint Repeater 5703 MMI ENTRIES CONFIGURE 5703 SOURCE TAG 304 DESTINATION TAG 305 BLOCK DIAGRAM MMI ENTRIES E nt lus BLOCK DIAGRAM E vts RAISE LOWER DEST 307 Pia RAMP O P DEST 308 PRESET DEST 111 S RAMP DEST 103 Ey ver chews HOME DEST 389 SPT SUM1 OP DEST 345 SPT SUM2 OP DEST 346 a sa alas SPT SUM3 OP DEST 347 Pid DEST 552 ROME Pid ERROR DEST 556 E oss POSITION DEST 341 Eos REF SPEED DEST 656 Eus us VALUE OP 1 DEST 697 i VALUE OP 2 DEST 704 EL os d aot
206. et Che 4 8 Setup Step 5 Run the drive anh aaa sasa hana hayaq 4 9 Setup Step 6 Autotuning the Drive a 4 10 Reset To Factory 4 10 4 11 Chapter 5 FUNCTION BLOCKS Cont 10 SET WP PARAMETERS A A y 5 1 5 1 cc D MAE s 5 3 5 i RAM e 5 5 FAG naa Se erat a 5 6 Remote en e eee e nennen 5 7 UL oto TER 5 8 Raise Lower Ramp eee rrt eee e o e e et 5 9 Inverse Times ES NS 5 10 Stop ROES 5 10 hama amna but txt O 5 13 5 14 Torque 5 15 LOOP 5 18 AGO ORO uu 5 21 Selpoiht SUm l 5 22 Reference 1 40000000002 001 000000000000 5 24 M 5 28 5 31 S Ratmip e ease ees uae aaa AM A A ea tatata 5 32 Flores MERE 5 34 5 35 5 45 aqa qaqaqa 5 45 5 45 Port n l PO ERRO
207. false 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 3 RAMPS MMI ENTRIES cancels oud RAMPS dn ik RAMP ACCEL TIME 54 10 0 SECS guidance Bese RAMP DECEL TIME 55 10 0 SECS fosse RAMP QUENCH 56 FALSE sse RAMP HOLD 57 TRUE Linked to 281 sie RAMP INPUT 58 0 00 5 Linked to 345 pistols ace 808 5 S RAMP 59 0 00 5 z Raia ERN RAMPING THRESH 60 1 1 00 AUTO RESET 61 TRUE DUM EXTERNAL RESET 62 FALSE dris RESET VALUE 63 0 00 5 Sia tay RAMPING 21 FALSE M PET RAMP OUTPUT 47 0 00 5 BLOCK DIAGRAM Reset Mode Reset Value System Reset External Reset Reset N Input Output Ramping 5 _ Ramp up time _ 4 Symmetric time Ramp down time Symmetric Ramp Times Figure 5 2 System Ramp PARAMETERS RAMP ACCEL DECEL TIME Acceleration Deceleration time The times are for an output change from 0 to 100 Example RE 5090 1090 change of Ramp Input from 10 to 50 with an acceleration time of 60 Seconds will take 100 H x 60Secs Effect of 5 on Ramp times l 3 5 Actual Ramp Time Ramp Time 100 x 5 1 Zero ramp times are a special case where the ramp can be effectively by passed RAMP QUENCH While TRUE the ramp input is held at zero NOTE This parameter is automaticall set TRUE during a no
208. fect of resetting it The value is also reset by the P1 port PASSWORD MMI ENTRIES ENTER PASSWORD 200 0x0000 ET CHANGE PASSWORD 201 0x0000 The 620 Vector Drives have a password system which can be used to prevent unauthorised access to the set up parameters Once the user has set a password then the set up parameters become read only Order to change the parameter values the correct password must first be entered All drives shipped from the factory have a default password value of 0000 The PASSWORD sub menu has 3 entries as follows ENTER PASSWORD This option is used to enter the password to regain access the set up parameters Password value entered must match the value previously set up in the CHANGE PASSWORD menu to gain access to the set up parameters CHANGE PASSWORD This option is used to change the password or to initially a user password A password has been set up the PARAMETER SAVE menu be used to save the password in non volatile CLEAR PASSWORD This option is used to clear the password value displayed under the ENTER PASSWORD menu This menu is accessed the ENTER PASSWORD value is to 0000 The CHANGE PASSWORD value is zero then the set up parameters will be locked EXAMPLE 1 PROGRAMMING OF PASSWORD 1 Access the CHANGE PASSWORD menu display will show CHANGE PASSWORD 0x0000 2 Using the up and down arrow keys set the password value required as a 4 digit hexadecima
209. for the drive D107 Mag current greater than motor current As error D103 D108 Nameplate rpm set to a value greater than the Set nameplate rpm to the correct value exactly base speed of the motor as given on the nameplate D109 Calculated value of rotor time constant is too As above large Probably due to an incorrect value of nameplate rpm D110 Calculated value of rotor time constant is too As above small Probably due to an incorrect value of nameplate rpm CAM_FULL_SWT_1 Internal software error CAM_FULL_SWT_2 CAM FULL SWT 3 CAM FULL SWT 4 620 Vector Drive HA463584 ALARMS Diagnostics and Fault Finding 6 7 If the drive trips then the display immediately shows a message indicating the reason for the trip Removing and re applying RUN resets alarm conditions The alarm message can be cleared from the display by pressing the E key Using the FIRST ALARM menu can redisplay it The possible alarm messages are LINK UNDERVOLTS LINK OVERVOLTAGE LINK OVERCURRENT HEATSINK TEMP MOTOR TEMP MOTOR STALLED EXTERNAL TRIP CONFIG ENABLE CHECKSUM FAILED EE VERSION ERROR SPD FBK TRIP EEPROM ERROR 620 Vector Drive HA463584 The DC link voltage is too low Possible reasons for this alarm message are a The mains voltage is too low b The mains supply has been lost c One of the three phases of the supply is missing The DC link voltage is too high Possible reasons for this alarm
210. h limits the capacitive current Screened cable has a higher capacitance and may cause problems in shorter runs The recommended choke values are shown in Table A 1 Table A 1 Recommended Choke Values For Cables Over 50m RMS Eurotherm 055931 Inductance Current 057283 057284 057285 055193 055253 Using Multiple Motors A Single Drive It is not possible to use a single Inverter to supply several motors 620 Vector Drive HA463584 9 2 Appendices Current Loop Gain Motors that are designed for high speed operation at several times base speed will tend to have lower impedance It may then be necessary to reduce the current loop gain In this case it is necessary to go into the test functions menu This is found under system reserved Select test function 2 This will cause the software to generate a square wave current demand The amplitude period and offset may be set by the parameters current amplitude current period and current offset respectively It is convenient best to set these numbers to 200 40 and zero respectively Return to the current loop menu under set up parameters Select gain This is a number which may vary between 0 and 255 This number will typically be around 70 for most motors but for higher speed motors it may need to be increased Note that to increase the gain the number in GAIN needs to be decreased Turn on the drive and observe the a
211. he current state of the digital output 3 E8 by default this is connected to drive READY Value of the raise lower ramp function Output of Preset function block Output of Setpoint Sum 1 function block 6 4 Diagnostics and Fault Finding SPT SUM O P 2 Output of Setpoint Sum 2 function block SPT SUM O P 3 Output of Setpoint Sum 3 function block RAMP OUTPUT Output of Ramp function block SPEED SETPOINT Speed loop total setpoint including the ramp output before the ramp to zero function The ramp to zero function block is only used while during the stopping states Normal Stop Program Stop and Coast Stop ENCODER Encoder speed feedback diagnostic in RPM Speed Feedback There are two speed feedback diagnostics available in the DIAGNOSTICS menu ENCODER This displays the speed setpoint in RPM SPEED FEEDBACK This displays the speed setpoint as a percentage Alarm Status First Alarm Alarm Status Health Store and Alarm Status Health Store First Alarm Health Store and Health Word are displayed as 16bit hexadecimal status words where every bit has unique meaning described in the table below These parameters are in the Alarms section of the MMI In Health Store and First Alarm only one bit is set at any one time All active bits are set in Health Word immediately the alarm condition is detected NOTE Most Alarms may be disabled inhibited by setting the appropriate flags in the SET UP PARAMETERS ALARMS 620
212. hen that the above Electronic Products when equipment and installed and operated with reference to the installed and operated with reference to appliances in the instructions in the Product Manual provided instructions in the Product Manual voltage range with each piece of equipment and using the provided with each piece of equipment is in when installed specified EMC filters is in accordance with the accordance with the following standard correctly relevant clauses from the following standards 50178 1998 5 50081 1 1992 BSEN50081 2 1994 5 50082 1 1992 and draft prEN50082 2 1992 as relevant apparatus MANUFACTURERS DECLARATIONS provided to aid We Eurotherm Drives Limited address as The above Electronic Products potential hazards your below declare under our sole responsibility are components to be incorporated into are mainly justification for that the above Electronic Products when machinery and may not be operated alone electrical rather EMC installed and operated with reference to the The complete machinery or installation using ian mechanical instructions in the Product Manual provided this equipment may only be put into service i compliance 2 the drive does not 7 with each piece of equipment and using when safety considerations of the Directive when the unit specified EMC filters is in accordance with the 89 392 EEC are fully adhered to fall under the is
213. hes in the windings of the machine Thermistors have a low resistance typically 200Q up to a reference temperature 125 C Above this temperature their resistance rises rapidly to greater than 2000Q Motor over temperature sensors should be connected in series between terminals B1 and B2 A motor over temperature alarm will be indicated if the external resistance between and B2 exceeds 2 6kQ 200Q The alarm is reset at 1 1kQ 2000 Terminal Terminal Description Digital Default configuration Number Pilot Health Open Collector 50mA Sink This output may be used to drive a pilot relay for an output contactor The contactor will be brought in on power up or by a drive start by software It is dropped out unconditionally bypassing the software if COAST STOP B4 is low or open circuit It will also drop out in the event of an alarm becoming active B4 Coast Stop When the Coast Stop input is at 24v the drive operates normally When the Coast Stop is at Ov or open circuit the drive no longer operates The motor coasts to rest Fast Stop When the Fast Stop input is held at 24v the drive operates as required by the inputs When the Fast Stop is at Ov or open circuit the drive provides a controlled or fast stop as defined by the Fast Stop parameters 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Pre Installation Planning 2 9 Table 2 2 Control Board Terminal Descriptions Continued Terminal Terminal Description Digital I O cont
214. his function outputs a pulse of 20ms duration when INPUT A to the block becomes TRUE When INPUT C is TRUE the output is inverted 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 44 Function Blocks Operation 1 0 EDGE A AND A B C OR A B C FLIP FLOP Description output input C FALSE input C TRUE 1 Duration 20ms Falling Edge Trigger Input B is not used This function outputs a pulse of 20ms duration when INPUT A to the block becomes FALSE When INPUT C is TRUE the output is inverted AND A B C Input State INPUT A A Output State INPUT OUTPUT INPUTC gt Refer to the Truth Table FALSE 0 TRUE 1 Input State INPUT A A Output State INPUT B OUTPUT 1 INPUT C 0 1 Refer to the Truth Table FALSE 0 TRUE 1 1 1 S FLIP FLOP This is a set dominant flip flop INPUT A functions as set and INPUT gt OUTPUT INPUTB gt o H INPUT B as reset 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 45 SERIAL LINKS The 620 has 2 serial ports as standard P1 and P3 these ports serve different purposes depending on the version of drive you have and the mode that the ports are operating in The 620 Comm is the only product that may use the two ports independently the 620Std and 620Link may only use one port at a time P3 PORT P3
215. ied by a legend The following section identifies each key by its legend and describes its function MENU The MENU select key allows the user to access the menu level or function indicated on the bottom line of the display This key does not alter any of the stored drive parameters Pressing this key while in LOCAL MODE LOCAL LED illuminated shows the actual speed of the motor as a percentage of the maximum speed If FULL MENUS are enabled then pressing the M key while displaying a tag value will display its TAG number ESCAPE The ESCAPE key allows the user to select the preceding menu level It does not alter any of the stored drive parameters The ESCAPE key always takes you back to the previous point where you were working UP When in the menu structure pressing the UP key steps through the options or settings for the currently displayed menu option This will either result in displaying different menu options or stepping through available settings for the selected parameter Numerical values are incremented by the UP key If the current entry is connected to another tag then the source tag number will be displayed along with the current tag s number Pressing this key while in LOCAL MODE LOCAL LED illuminated increases the speed reference The speed of the motor is shown on the display while the button is pressed as a percentage of the maximum speed 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Command Keys Setting up
216. iguration CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE This chapter contains information regarding the physical mounting arrangements cable and fuse selection as well as information regarding EMC installation The purpose of this chapter is to provide guidelines for the safe and efficient installation of the equipment The theory of and requirement for dynamic braking is also explained within this chapter CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP AND COMMISSIONING A description of the user adjustments and switch settings to configure the drive for a particular application The purpose of this chapter is to guide the user through pre and post power on checks and provide running performance adjustment procedures Information is also provided on the function and set up of operational parameters using the Man Machine Interface MMI CHAPTER 5 FUNCTION BLOCKS This section provides reference information for the more advanced programming capabilities of the 620 Vector series controllers Each section describes a particular functional area and the associated menu options which are used to alter the parameters Where appropriate a functional block diagram illustrates the how the function blocks operate Reference to the Functional Description and Microprocessor Block Diagram in Chapter 2 may be of assistance in understanding the relationship between these functional diagrams CHAPTER 6 DIAGNOSTICS AND FAULT FINDING A description of the procedures to diagnose and tr
217. ils 620 types 4 amp 5 2 60 157 mepa 2 4 40mm_MINIMUM sot s _ AIR GAP BOTH SIDES RRO S zd FILTER MOUNTING 90 0 STANDARD CIS o S 6 FIXINGS IN TWO ALTERNATIVE m SEIS OF 4 POSNS X TATA NN i E ROJET DRIVE MOUNTED TO FILTER USING aan Eum S 5 se de DRIVE UNITS AS JS 584s 620 4 amp 5 ag 88 BE t as ee OSS lt oo ee DRIVE TERMINALS FS RE 5 Phelelelal elelel YE 1E SHH sss 2 SIDE VIEW PLAN VIEW FILTER WALL MOUNTING DETAI INTERCONNECTION LEADS ATTACHED are es IO FILTER ROUTE THROUGH DUCT FILTERS C0388966U021 18amp FOR 584s 620 4 03889660035 24amp FOR 5845 620 Type 4 GLAND BOX C0388966U045 38amp FOR 5845 620 5 NOTE You must fit the 620 module with the top cover gland box and trunking as supplied All interconnecting leads between the 620 and the filter must be enclosed within the duct 620 Vector Drive
218. ination procedure is entered when the selection of a particular instrument is no longer required or when a 620 does not respond to a message or replies with an EOT character The computer assumes Master status and transmits an EOT character to enable all the instruments on the data link to respond to the next GID UID address parameter No Response Under certain circumstances the computer may not receive a response from the 620 This could be due to any of the following reasons 1 Group Unit address identifiers not recognised 2 An error e g parity is found in one or more of the characters up to and including ENQ 3 Communications loop failure perhaps due to noise or wrong baud rate being selected 4 Hardware failure In these cases the computer should be programmed to time out i e wait for a response for a short time 160ms minimum before trying again The sequence diagram for the data read function is given in Figure 5 24 MESSAGE PROTOCOL ESTABLISH TRANSFER TERMINATION PROCEDURE CONNECTION PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C SENDER SUPERVISORY SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR MASTER SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE MASTER STATUS 584 SLAVE MASTER MASTER MASTER SLAVE STATUS INITIA lt app X cmp gt N ENTRY REPLY S Q o LANES RE T ENTRY J A RE 5 ENTRY T ADD cmp BCC x READ NEXT FETCHES PARAMETER NEXT PARAMETER
219. ine may be issued and mark applied Professional end users with EMC expertise who are using drive modules and cubicle systems defined as components who supply place on the market or install the relevant apparatus must take responsibility for demonstrating EMC conformance and applying the CE mark and issuing an EC Declaration of Conformity Eurotherm Guide More information is available in a separate Eurotherm Guide entitled Short Form Overview of European Directives for Variable Speed Drives and Applications part number HA389770 available from your local Eurotherm Drives office 620 Vector Drive HA463584 7 6 The European Directives and the CE Mark CERTIFICATES 620 STD COM L 74 5 6 7 EC DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY Date CE marked first applied 07 11 96 Issued for EMC Directive Low Voltage Directive The drive is CE compliance In accordance with the EEC Directive In accordance with the EEC Directive marked in with the 89 336 EEC and amended by 92 31 EEC and 73 23 and amended by 93 68 fl accordance with Directive when 93 68 EEC Article 10 and Annex 1 EMC Article 13 and Annex LOW VOLTAGE low voltage the unit is used DIRECTIVE DIRECTIVE directive for We Eurotherm Drives Limited address as We Eurotherm Drives Limited address as electrical below declare under our sole responsibility below declare under our sole responsibility that the above Electronic Products w
220. ing of alarms by a start command being reapplied By connecting this to a normally open digital i p the drive will wait for a LOW HIGH signal before restarting after a drive trip NOTE 620L configurations from release 2 x set the value of ACK ALARM to FALSE requiring a low high low transition to acknowledge an active alarm STALL STALL INHIBIT Disables the stall alarm STALL TORQUE The threshold at which torque must reach to be deemed as stalled STALL SPEED The threshold for speed feedback below which the stall condition is looked for Note the speed demand must also be above this threshold STALL DELAY Time stall has to be present before if generates an alarm Stall Algorithm IF ISPEED DEMAND gt STALL SPEED AND ISPEED FEEDBACK lt STALL SPEED AND ITORQUE DEMAND gt STALL TORQUE THEN Start Stall Timer UNDER VOLTAGE UNDER V LEVEL Engineering only sets the level above which UNDER VOLTS is TRUE UNDER VOLTS Engineering only Under voltage signal used to trigger saving of persistent data 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 4 Function Blocks OVER SPEED OVER SPD INHIBIT OVER SPEED LEVEL 5703 RECEIVE ERROR 5703 RCV INHIBI SPEED FEEDBACK SPD FBK DELAY SPD FBK THRESHD SPD FBK INHIBI DIAGNOSTICS OPERATING MODE DRIVE START DRIVE ENABLE READY RUN HEALTH STORE HEALTH WORD FIRST ALARM HEALTHY HEALTH OUTPUT CALIBRATION MMI ENTRIES Disables the overspeed alarm Threshold above which an oversp
221. installed 11 3 digits specifying engineering special options 00 No special options n Code for the special engineering option installed Table 1 19 Product Code Block Descriptions U U N Encoder Wire ended 0 B B 0 K S W 7 Four characters specifying the communications protocol and its hardware implementation method 0000 No communications options fitted N A Indicates the particular communications option 0 0 1 0 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Example Code 620STD 0750 400 00 10 UK EN W 0000 000 B 1 000 000 This code indicates a drive which is a 620 Standard product 75kW power rating 380 460 input supply Eurotherm Drives livery Enclosed mechanical package IP20 No additional optional operator station UK language Wire ended 15V encoder option No optional communications No optional loaded software Brake switch fitted with default value resistors supplied No aux supply option fitted No special options 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Product Overview 1 3 1 4 Product Overview 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Pre Installation Planning 2 Chapter 2 Pre Installation Planning INTRODUCTION This chapter contains a functional description of the 620 Vector Drive to enable a sound understanding of the system and notes for consideration prior to installation FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW The 620 Vector enables very high performance control of 3 phase AC induction motors fitted with a compatible en
222. inued Number Jog When the Jog input is held at 24v the drive jogs provided input B7 Start is held low and B4 Coast Stop B8 Enable amp B5 Fast Stop are held high When the Jog input is removed the drive will ramp down to zero at the Jog Ramp Rate B Start When a high input is applied to this terminal the drive will operate provided there are no alarms 6 Jog is held low B4 Coast Stop B8 Enable amp B5 Fast Stop are held high When the input is removed the drive will perform a regenerative stop to zero speed 7 B8 Enable The Enable input provides a means of electronically inhibiting drive operation If the enable input is low false all control loops will be inhibited and the drive will not function 24 power Internally generated 24v supply which can be used for digital inputs Maximum load is 200mA Terminal Terminal Description Analogue I O Default configuration Number GND Analogue screen connection Direct 2 Trim input direct into speed loop with high speed coupling Used for external loops i e position controllers 10 100 Speed trim 10 100 Speed trim i Speed feed back Voltage reference Terminal Terminal Description Reference Encoder Number 620L version only A Channel A D D2 D3 Chonnel B D C2 Ramp I P 1 A bi directional input that is summed with F2 to form the input to the System Ramp 10 Full speed 10
223. ion No error Invalid Mnemonic Checksum BCC error Line error parity overrun or framing Write only Read only Invalid Data Encoding error Data out of range Tag initialisation error US control character expected RS control character expected GS control character expected FS control character expected Run Inhibit Configure Inhibit Tag is connected unused Note the 3dr digit is used to denote a Drive instrument type Older drives used to use an F in this location to denote Other instrument type COMMAND STATUS The following command status parameters are supported Mnemonic Description Encoding Range Access Command gt XXXX See Below Write Only State gt See Below Read Only Save Command gt XXXX See Below Write Only Save State gt XXXX See Below Read Only COMMAND 1 Command 1 is a write only parameter used to modify the state of the 620 and to load configuration data from non volatile memory The following table lists the valid values for the request Description Restore Factory Defaults P3 port only Exit Re Configuration Mode Enter Re Configuration Mode 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks State 2 State 12 is a read only parameter used to determine the major state of the 620 The following table lists the valid values for the response Description Re Configuring Mode Normal Operation Mode Save Comman
224. ir gts PROFILE INPUT 554 0 00 PROFILE MININPUT 555 0 00 OUTPUT 546 0 00 CLAMPED 544 TRUE PRESET SELECT 1 92 FALSE lt 285 gis SELECT 2 93 FALSE 289 AIT SELECT 3 94 FALSE 525 INVERT 109 FALSE 1 95 0 00 2 96 25 00 3 97 50 00 4 98 100 00 5 99 0 00 6 100 25 00 7 101 50 00 8 102 100 00 110 0 00 INPUT 597 0 00 SYMMETRIC 667 TRUE fols ys ACCELERATION 106 10 00 cars DECELERATION 666 10 00 JERK 1 107 10 00 doas JERK 2 663 10 00 finda ae JERK 3 664 10 00 JERK 4 665 10 00 AUTO RESET 669 TRUE EXTERNAL RESET 104 FALSE RESET VALUE 105 0 00 Cas QUENCH 108 FALSE SPEED 316 FALSE AT SPEED LEVEL 612 1 00 hi ACCEL O P 253 0 00 hel OVERSHOOT THRESH 254 5 00 Bresse ERROR THRESHOLD 668 0 50 ES cared ess OUTPUT 598 0 00 fi Foe HOME S COME HOME 397 FALSE fisse HOMING DISTANCE 396 2048 fagi 1 ENCODER SCALE 398 4 00 rM ENS LINEAR 388 FALSE OVERSHOOT LIMIT 773 1 00 394 0 00 fits HOME OUTPUT 395 0 00 OPERATORS VALUE OPERATOR 1 me INPUT A 692 0 00 INPUT 693 0 00 Feia INPUT C 6
225. is resumed before the load has reached zero speed then the load is ramped back up to the actual demanded speed If there is not enough kinetic energy in the load or the deceleration rate is set too long then an under voltage trip will be trigged Over Voltages may also occur if the deceleration rate is too fast and there is insufficient dynamic braking fitted 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 2 0 Function Blocks SYSTEM INTEGRATION MMI In acommon DC bus system only the Master drive should have the power loss logic enabled Otherwise each drive will be following its own ramp and web speed will no longer be maintained With the DC link connected together once the master starts to regenerate and the slaves will follow and the link voltage will be maintained by the sum of all the drives The slaves must follow the master as quickly as possible to reduce the drain on the link the 5703 setpoint repeater is a good way of achieving this Some DC braking should be provided to prevent over voltage trips flow PWR LOSS CNTRL ENABLE 639 FALSE f iets sS vei TRIP THRESHOLD 640 0 VOLTS filas CONTROL BAND 657 20 VOLTS fosse veu DECEL RATE 641 2 50 fisica sie ACCEL RATE 644 0 50 fc cete er TIME LIMIT 643 30 000 SECS mus PWR LOSS ACTIVE 766 FALSE ENABLE Enables the power loss control option without this TAG set the power loss software is inactive TRIP THRESHOLD The TRIP THRESHOL
226. is value is pre loaded directly into the output while Ramp Reset is TRUE or at power up In order to catch a spinning load smoothly bumpless transfer or Fly Catching connect speed feedback TAG 7 Source to this reset value TAG 63 Destination using an internal link RAMPING Diagnostic indicating the function is ramping see RAMP THRESHOLD RAMP OUTPUT Diagnostic ramp output value Note The System ramp may also be used for stopping the drive if STOP RATES USE SYSTEM RAMP is TRUE AUTO RESET is TRUE and EXTERNAL RESET is FALSE in this case the Sequencer will set RAMP QUENCH to be TRUE This will force the ramp input to zero and only when the ramp output is zero will the stop ramp be invoked RAMP QUENCH is not normally shown on the MMI 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 253 OP STATION LOCAL MODE BLOCK DIAGRAM Local Setpoint Local Ramp Stop Ramp Up Key Down Key Reset Value Accel Time Decel Time S Ramp Figure 5 4 Local Setpoint Only active when the drive is in Local mode MMI ENTRIES OP STATION E SETPOINT 507 0 0 TREE LOCAL KEY ENABLE 632 TRUE soie Behe sels START UP VALUES Ox ere ended SETPOINT 503 0 0 REV DIRECTION 504 FALSE PROGRAM 505 FALSE LOCAL 506 FALSE RAMP ACCEL TIME 511 10 0 SECS sdb ee Er eue RAMP DECEL TIME 512 10 0 SECS S RAMP 516 0 00 hzc s RAMP OUTPUT 509 0 00
227. l This product contains materials which are consignable waste under the Special Waste Regulations 1996 which complies with the EC Hazardous Waste Directive Directive 91 689 EEC We recommend you dispose of the appropriate materials in accordance with the valid environmental control laws The following table shows which materials can be recycled and which have to be disposed of in a special way plastics material printed circuit board 620 Vector Drive HA463584 8 2 Servicing The printed circuit board should be disposed of in one of two ways 1 High temperature incineration minimum temperature 1200 C by an incinerator authorised under parts A or B of the Environmental Protection Act 2 Disposal in an engineered land fill site that is licensed to take aluminium electrolytic capacitors Do not dispose of in a land fill site set aside for domestic waste Packaging During transport our products are protected by suitable packaging This is entirely environmentally compatible and should be taken for central disposal as secondary raw material 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Appendices 9 Chapter 9 Appendices APPENDIX A Brake Motors Brake motors are used in applications requiring a mechanical brake for safety or other operational reasons The motor can be a standard induction motor fitted with an electromechanical brake or it could be a special conical rotor machine In the case of a conical rotor machine the spring load
228. l number display will show for example CHANGE PASSWORD 0x1234 3 When you are happy with the password make a note of the value and keep it in a safe place 4 5 Press the E key to take you out ofthe CHANGE PASSWORD menu Display will show This is to remind you to save the password along with the other parameters before you remove power from the drive the E key again to exit the CHANGE PASSWORD menu 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 61 Access the CLEAR PASSWORD menu and press the M key Display will show CLEAR PASSWORD PASSWORD CLEARED This indicates that the password value entered above has been locked into the system CLEAR PASSWORD sets the value in the ENTER PASSWORD menu to 0x0000 otherwise the password would still be displayed 6 wm 7 S 8 The set up parameters are now locked to use PARAMETER SAVE put the password value in non volatile memory you now go back to the CHANGE PASSWORD menu the password value is hidden and the display will show CHANGE PASSWORD EXAMPLE 2 SET UP PARAMETERS WHEN THE PASSWORD IS SET 1 Access the ENTER PASSWORD menu display will show 0x0000 2 Use the up and down arrow keys to select your password 3 Press the E key to exit the ENTER PASSWORD menu 4 Accessthe SETUP PARAMETERS menu to make any necessary changes 5 When all parameter changes have been made come back to the CLEAR PASSWORD menu to hide the password v
229. lable lay unshielded motor cables in a metal conduit which will act as a shield The conduit must be continuous with a direct electrical contact to the drive module and motor housing If links are necessary use braid with a minimum cross sectional area of 10 Safety earthing always takes precedence over EMC earthing The use of screened cable without an EMC filter is not recommended as line conducted interference will increase substantially and the capacitive coupling of the output cable to earth will result in high earth leakage currents To ensure the correct operation of the 620 drive module some control and signal cables encoder all analogue inputs and communications have to be screened back to the inverter terminals The screen integrity must be continuous right back to the drive if not connected to the cubicle Always minimise the length of screen stripped back to make this connection The screen should only be connected at the drive end If high frequency noise is still a problem earth at the non drive end via 0 1 uF capacitor Screening and Earthing When Mounted in an Enclosure Make sure the requirements of EN60204 are adhered to with electrical equipment for machines Satisfactory EMC performance is only achievable when the 620 drive module filter and associated equipment is mounted on a conducting metal mounting panel Beware of constructions using insulating mounting panels or undefined mounting structures A single poin
230. lation Procedure 3 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION The following instructions describe the wiring requirements for operation of the 620 as basic speed controller The variety of specific drive applications precludes the inclusion of diagrams showing all wiring options Power Wiring Caution Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the wiring without first disconnecting the drive from the circuit being tested Observe all national standards and local electricity supply company regulations while installing the 620 Vector drive The following considerations apply to all installations 1 Power cables must be rated at a minimum of 110 of the expected supply current 2 Power cables particularly 3 phase motor cables must be routed well away from cables carrying setpoints or feedback signals screened motor feedback cables and cables from other electronic equipment in the same plant 3 The motor supply cables should be screened to avoid causing undue interference to other equipment in the area 4 The mains power supply must be 3 phase and within the voltage tolerances specified in ELECTRICAL RATINGS Power Circuit in Chapter 1 of this manual The supply must be connected to power board terminals L1 L2 and L3 of the 620 Vector drive 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 4 Installation Procedure Minimum Cable Diameters and Supply Protection The incoming mains supply should be protected as shown below Controller Rating Co
231. le for interfacing external analogue inputs 2 or 4 wire RS 485 serial communications 620 Vector Drive HA463584 1 4 Product Overview Electrical Ratings Power Circuit Input Voltage 380V to 460V 10 50 60Hz pepe eps Input Fuse Circuit 40 50 631 100 1251 160 200 Breaker A Switching 5kHz 3kHz Frequency Input Voltage 208V to 240V 10 50 60Hz CT mro me ome sce s ss z s m m a pepe ar Breaker Approx loss W Hs srl Eun 1300 1600 Switching 3kHz Frequency Common data 5 TYPE 6 TYPE 7 Output Voltage Input Voltage max Output Overload 150 for 60s Output Frequency 0 to 240Hz Ambient Operating 0 to 50 C Temperature Range 0 to 40 C for 2 2kW 380 460V UL Type 1 0 to 40 C Earth Leakage gt 50mA AC Permanent Protective Earthing Required Current Suitable for earth referenced TN and non earth referenced IT supplies Table 1 2 620 Electrical Specifications Note 1 For installations requiring UL compliance short circuit protection Semiconductor Fuses should be installed in the 3 phase supply to the 620 products These fuses are suitable for branch circuit short circuit protection of the solid state motor controllers only For installations NOT requiring UL compliance use class T fuses or a circuit breaker 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Product Overview 1 E Electrical R
232. le taking care not to obstruct any ventilation spacing and be segregated from all other cables If this cable busbar exceeds 0 3m in length then it must be replaced with a screened armoured cable with the screen armour earthed at both the filter and inverter ends with large area contact surfaces preferably with metal cable glands The connection between the 620 drive module and the motor must be installed away from all other cables or wires Ideally the filter will be mounted onto the same metallic panel as the drive The RF connection between the inverter filter and panel should be enhanced as follows Remove any paint insulation between the mounting points of the EMC filter 620 drive module and panel Liberally apply petroleum jelly over the mounting points and securing threads to prevent corrosion Alternatively conducting paint could be used on mounting panels If the proceeding is not possible then the RF earth bond between the filter and 620 drive module is usefully improved by making an additional RF earth connection using wire braid of at least 10 mm cross sectional area due to skin effect For wall mount application ensure that the cable between the EMC filter and the 620 drive module cable is passed through conduit mounted between the filter and the Gland Box This cable must be as short as possible and segregated from all other cables The conduit must be electrically connected to the filter and drive module gland box N
233. lecting UDP XFER TX QV D 2 5 The file ends in a ctrl z some packages this automatically closes the file If this is not the case when the 620 says it has finished and the host has stopped scrolling text close the file by hand The last line should read 00000001FF 8 The file can now be treated like any normal file UDP UPLOAD UDP XFER RX Caution The 620 UDP files are not compatible with any other EUROTHERM Product Uploading a corrupted UDP file cause loss of data This is the transfer of parameters from the host computer to the 620 This information is written directly to EEprom so all the drive s current settings will be overwritten 1 Connect the 620 to the host using the appropriate lead 2 Using a standard communications package prepare the host to transfer an ASCII file Ensure the host s serial port is set up first 3 Set the P3 MODE to DISABLE 4 Start uploading on the 620 by selecting UDP XFER RX 5 When the 620 says RECEIVING begin the file transmission 6 file ends a ctrl z which the 620 uses to close the file 7 Pressing key must now resets 620 as the message on the MMI indicates ERROR REPORT ERROR REPORT See EE ERROR CODES NOTE Writing to this parameter has the effect of resetting it 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 48 Function Blocks ASCII All these parameters are common between P3 port and P1 port MMI ENTRIES SERIAL L
234. mance and basic operation of the drive The status LEDs show the condition of the drive The Command keys provide a means of locally operating the drive On e VECTOR DRIVE RUN TYPE x CHASSIS f un M LOCAL Figure 4 1 Man Machine Interface MMI MAN MACHINE INTERFACE MMI The physical parts of the MMI comprise the LCD display and function keys The software element comprises an extensive menu system Display and Menu The MMI display comprises two lines of plain text information to provide access to the various menu options and parameters The top line contains the title of the current menu or parameter and the second contains either one of the options within the menu or the value or status of the parameter NOTE There are two user views of the MMI REDUCED and FULL The reduced view significantly simplifies the MMI structure by removing the more advanced menu entries These views may be selected under MENUS FULL MENUS TRUE FALSE Definition of terms Certain terms have specific meanings in the context of the MMI The most common of these are defined as follows Default A value which is pre programmed into the 620 Vector drive during manufacture and which may be changed if required Note that it is possible to completely reset all parameters to their default settings by following the procedure Reset to Defaults later in this chapter Diagnostic A displayed status indicator which can be
235. ment is defined as particularly sensitive and care must be taken in the installation Any transducers which produce low level analogue outputs 1 volt e g load cells strain gauges thermocouples piezoelectric transducers anometers LVDT s A M radios long and medium wave only Video cameras and closed circuit TV Office personal computers Capacitive devices such as proximity sensors and level transducers Mains borne communication systems Equipment not suitable for operation in the intended EMC environment i e with insufficient immunity to new EMC standards 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Setting up and Commissioning 4 1 Chapter 4 Setting up and Commissioning INTRODUCTION This chapter describes how to use the Man Machine Interface MMI the necessary steps to set up and commission an installed 620 Vector Drive In order to commission the drive successfully it is necessary to understand the basic operation of the MMI PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION The 620 Vector Drives feature an MMI panel shown in Figure 4 1 Man Machine Interface MMI comprising 2x16 character liquid crystal display LCD four function keys six command keys and four status LEDs Programming commands and data are entered into the drive by using the function keys to navigate the MMI menu structure and setting various parameters The LCD and function keys provide a means of tailoring the drive for individual application requirements monitoring perfor
236. ments on the link and causes them to examine the next four transmitted characters to see if they correspond with their group unit address identifiers GID These characters represent the group address identifier repeated for security UID These characters represent the required unit address identifier repeated for security Together GID and UID define the address of a particular instrument If for example GID 3 and UID 4 then the instrument to be addressed is number 34 CD C2 These characters specify the parameter by mnemonic ENQ This character indicates the end of the message and that it is an enquiry The transmission of this message initiates a response procedure from the 620 Valid Response of the 620 to this Message After the message has been sent the computer adopts slave status and expects to receive a reply from the 620 In so doing the 620 assumes Master status and providing the 620 has successfully received the message in full it responds in the following form STX C1 C2 D1 D2 D3 Dn ETX Which constitutes a message defined as STX Start of text C1 C2 Parameter specified by mnemonic D1 to Dn Value of the requested parameter string may be of any length as determined by the data The 620 responds with the shortest message that represents the data value If the data value is an integer then it does not send a decimal point Trailing zeros in the decimal part are not sent
237. n In normal operation the drive dissipates heat and must be mounted to allow the free flow of air vertically through the unit Care must be taken to ensure that the mounting surface is cool and that any heat generated by adjacent equipment is not transmitted to the 620 Vector Drive Similarly ensure that the heat generated by the drive will not adversely affect any other equipment or cabling For adequate ventilation of the drive minimum clearance as defined in Figure 3 1 Mechanical Outline Drawings must be maintained Side by side mounting of two or more drives is permissible providing the ambient operating temperature is not exceeded 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 42 Installation Procedure lt xo Increased area each side to be unobstructed when UL Type 1 Option fitted Local STANDARD PRODUCT 1 AIR ENTRY Figure 3 1 Mechanical Outline Drawings Outside Fixing Centres mm Cooling air Overall Exit air Conduit Dimensions clearance height clearance hole size mm mm mm mm mm a heer EA E EX Table 3 1 620 Mounting Arrangements cic soo 2o so 1o sr aso mo 1 s ws 9 Full details of through panel mounting of type 7 not available at time of going to press Please contact Eurotherm Drives Engineering department 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Instal
238. n command Drive speed and current loop are enabled quenched Indicates whether the drive is in RUN JOG 1 STOP etc Indicates that there is a co processor fitted and working normally only applicable to the 620L and 620Adv 620 Vector Drive HA463584 ANIN 1 C3 ANIN 2 C4 ANIN 3 F2 ANIN 4 F3 ANIN 5 F4 ANOUT 1 C5 ANOUT 2 F5 COAST STOP PROGRAM STOP START B7 JOG INPUT 6 ENABLE B8 DIGIN 1 E2 DIGIN 2 E3 DIGIN 3 E4 DIGIN 4 E5 DIGOUT 1 E6 DIGOUT 2 E7 DIGOUT 3 E8 RAISE LOWER O P PRESET O P SPT SUM O P 1 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Diagnostics and Fault Finding 6 3 Diagnostic displaying the current state of the analogue input C3 by default this is connected to Speed setpoint no 1 Diagnostic displaying the current state of the analogue input 2 C4 by default this is connected to Direct speed setpoint no 2 current demand Diagnostic displaying the current state of the analogue input 3 F2 by default this is connected to Speed setpoint no 3 ramped Diagnostic displaying the current state of the analogue input 4 F3 by default this is unconnected Diagnostic displaying the current state of the analogue input 5 F4 by default this is unconnected Diagnostic displaying the current state of the analogue output 1 C5 by default this is connected to Speed feedback Diagnostic displaying the current state of the analogue
239. n limits provided they are installed with the specified EMC filters for CE marking in accordance with the a installation instructions Enclosure Port radiated 55011 NONE UNI cubicle mount wall mount AC Power Port conducted with EN55011 1991 Class B EN50081 1 1992 specified filter AC Power Port conducted no filter EN55011 1991 130dBuV 9 150kHz common mode 130dBuV 150kHz differential mode Reducing with frequency by 20dB decade 6kHz switching frequency 50 metres screened motor cable Up to 50 meter screened motor cable 620 Vector Drive HA463584 The European Directives and the CE Mark 7 5 All 620 Vector drive modules meet the following EMC immunity performance criteria as defined in prEN50082 2 1992 when installed and used as recommended Phenomenon Test Acceptance Generic Standard Criterion Standard Enclosure IEC 801 2 4 kV CD 8 kV AD self recovery EN50082 1 Port RF Field IEC 801 3 10 V m 1 kHz no change 1992 Fast Transient IEC 801 4 2 self recovery Draft prEN50082 2 1992 Burst Surge IEC 801 5 1 kV P P 2 kV P E self recovery Signal amp Fast Transient Burst IEC 801 4 self recovery Control Power Fast Transient Burst IEC 801 4 self recovery Interfaces The EMC filters for 620 Vector drive modules may be flash tested in circuit up to DC 2850 for 1 min Ensure all other equipment that may be damaged by such flash testing has been suitably isol
240. nded to describe the apparatus into which the product is installed This manual is to be made available to all persons who are required to design an application install service or come into direct contact with the product APPLICATIONS ADVICE Applications advice and training is available from Eurotherm Drives Ltd Cont 3 Safety Information wi A INSTALLATION Ensure that mechanically secure fixings are used as recommended Ensure that cooling and air flow around the product are as recommended Ensure that cables and wire terminations are as recommended and clamped to required torque Ensure that the installation and commissioning of this product are carried out by a competent person Ensure that the product rating is not exceeded A CAUTION When power is removed from the product it must not be re applied for a period of 30 seconds to allow the inrush limit circuit to operate correctly A APPLICATION RISK The integration of this product into other apparatus or system is not the responsibility of Eurotherm Drives Ltd as to its applicability effectiveness or safety of operation or of other apparatus or systems Where appropriate the user should consider some aspects of the following risk assessment A RISK ASSESSMENT Under fault conditions or conditions not intended The motor speed may be incorrect The motor speed may be excessive The direction of rotation may be incorrect The motor may energised unle
241. ne menu This menu contains 2 flags which control the autotune action Mag I Autotune must be set true to ensure that the mag current autotune is carried out and Set Tr Rtd Spd must be true for the rotor time constant calculation to be done Go into the autotune menu under Setup Parameters see Menu Structure on page4 6 and ensure these flags are set to be true When Autotune has finished the 620 Vector drive is set up with all the information required for basic operation as a speed controller It is now necessary to save this information in non volatile memory so that it will be retained when power is removed This is done via the PARAMETER SAVE menu See Parameter Save under Menu Structure on page 4 6 At the end of the autotune process the drive will calculate a new value of rotor time constant If it is significantly different from the old value it may be advisable to run the autotune again The values of magnetising current obtained on the second pass will then be slightly more accurate as the drive will now be using a more accurate value of rotor time constant Reset To Factory Defaults Disconnect the power to the drive Hold down the and buttons while re applying power and keep both buttons depressed for at least two seconds after power up Note The start input must also be low B7 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Setting up and Commissioning 4 1 The MMI display will read SELF TEST EEPROM NOT READ Press
242. neric Standards When the new EMC Drive Product Standard for Power Drive System EN61800 3 becomes available Q 3 4 1996 EMC filters will only be mandatory in residential type EMC environments if this is the most appropriate standard to use for demonstrating conformance of the relevant apparatus EMC competent bodies are today using the draft EMC Drive Product Standard to demonstrate conformance using the technical construction file route The EMC Drive Product Standard as CEMEP is discussed in more detail in the Eurotherm Application manual entitled EMC Installation Guidelines for modules and systems part number HA388879 available from your local Eurotherm Drives office It is important for the customer to identify what EMC standards are to be applied to the final machine system and in what EMC environment it will operate so that any additional compliance costs can be minimised It should be remembered that when two or more EMC compliant components are combined to form the final machine system the resulting machine system may not be compliant Emissions from combined components tend to be additive whilst the immunity remains constant Filter Selection 620 Vector drive modules can be marked as in CEMEP validity field 1 when used with the specified specially designed EMC filters to comply with the mains terminal limits of EN55011 Class B or EN5008 1 1 as indicated previously and when installed in accordance with the EMC i
243. ng between the filter body and gland box is shown in the mechanical mounting drawing figures 3 8 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 Figure 3 7 Filter Cubicle Mounting Details 620 types 4 amp 5 2 60 157 10mm MINIMUM 228 AIR BOTH SIDES 200 0 RETRO FIT CIS 515 150 0 STANDARD CTS eur MOUND WER IAS FILTER MOUNTING E FACE AT TOP 6 FIXINGS IN 2 ALTERNATIVE SETS OF 4 POSNS p az i TE gt IO FILTER USING Sle MG FIXINGS IN ZIS bo 4 POSITIONS lt DRIVE UNITS S 5845 520 4 amp 5 18 lt ION n Seely gt 5 DRIVE TERMINALS D B2 ES x LIT ull g PI LI elie a 3 PT OY zi ggg elg EAH q INTERCONNECTION LEADS ATTACHED TO FILTER SIDE VIEW PLAN VIEW FILTER CUBICLE MOUNTING DETAIL FILTERS C0388966U021 18amp FOR 5848 620 Type 4 C0388966U035 24amp FOR 5845 620 Type 4 CO388966U045 38amp FOR 584s 620 5 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 8 Installation Procedure Figure 3 8 Filter Wall Mounting Deta
244. ning The next step is to Autotune the drive to automatically set up the remaining basic parameters Setup Step 6 Autotuning the Drive The purpose of the Autotune function is to set up the magnetising current and rotor time constant for this motor This is a two stage process The first stage runs the drive up to various speeds to tune the magnetisation current The second stage calculates the rotor time constant from the MAG CURRENT and motor nameplate details which you entered Caution When the Autotune is carried out the motor will run at base speed for several minutes It is essential that no load is applied to the output shaft for the Autotune to function correctly A gearbox may be permissible provided it does not significantly load the motor but it should be disconnected where possible Ensure that you are in the CONFIGURE DRIVE menu Scroll around the menu with the or buttons until you locate AUTOTUNE Press Press to set the AUTOTUNE flag TRUE Then restart the drive The drive will now accelerate first to base speed and then to a number of other speeds up to the value set in MAX SPEED RPM At each speed it will set up the magnetising current for this motor When it has finished it will then calculate the rotor time constant If any error messages occur on the MMI refer to Chapter 6 Alarms If the autotune fails to run but no error message appears on the MMI this may be due to a wrong configuration in the autotu
245. nstallation instructions in this Product Manual chapter 3 The Class B limit is the most stringent limit applied in Europe to date and allows product to be used in either the residential commercial and light industrial or industrial EMC environments Refer to Consideration of EMC environments in this chapter for more details The specified EMC filters for the 620 Vector drive modules are summarised in table 3 3 in Chapter 3 The fitment of the specified EMC filter is mandatory where CE marking is applied If the customer is treating the 620 Vector drive module as a component for supply to EMC competent professional assemblers CEMEP validity field 2 and is taking the EMC responsibility then the filters are optional and may assist the customer in achieving EMC compliance In this situation the customer may also achieve compliance by less expensive more global measures depending on the limits to be achieved such as the use of a combination of global or local filtering and screening methods natural mitigation through distance or use of distributed parasitic elements of the existing installation Filter Installation The required EMC emission and immunity performance and CE marking of 620 Vector drive modules can only be achieved when the EMC installation instructions in Chapter 3 are adhered to Specification of Achievable EMC Emission and Immunity 620 Vector drive modules with the option to be CE marked meet the following EMC emissio
246. ntrol Circuits and Software 0 22012 11 0202 020 00 01 0 2 1 Power CIRCUITS s nunana tete IR Itt be ate ATE eS e TED eed 2 1 e 2 1 Built in diagnostics 2 1 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS eene 2 4 2 5 Differences between 2 5 TERMINAL 5 2 7 Control Board ee assess ese 2 7 2 11 Power Terminali monin temen ee 2 11 620 4 2 12 DIEI CORP 2 13 620 Type nnne Renee 2 Error Bookmark not defined 620 Type gasas s edad ud nd Ed acea 2 15 NUM MM 2 15 TERMINATIORIS 5 2 528h9S8h S9 RSNS HORS HONSNSASNSASNSNSNSE 2 16 Chapter 3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION E 3 1 INSTALLATION 3 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 3 1 putei nl es 3 1 EE 3 1 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3 3 power WINING sono 3 3 Minimum Cable Diameters and Supply Protection 3 4 o AL eI LAL Peeters
247. ntroller Rating Fuse or Circuit Cable Diameter mm 380 460 Volts 208 240 Volts Breaker Amps NORMAL Cable diameters listed assume the conductors are in free air Fuses are standard type with slow blow characteristic or a circuit breaker NOTE These are typical values only If in doubt please observe your national standards or local electricity supply regulations For installations requiring compliance with UL standards refer to Special Considerations and Electrical Ratings Power Circuit in chapter 1 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 5 Earthing WARNING THE MOTOR MUST BE CONNECTED TO AN APPROPRIATE SAFETY EARTH FAILURE TO DO SO CONSTITUTES AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD ALL FREQUENCY CONVERTERS MUST BE PERMANENTLY EARTHED In accordance with the European Low Voltage Directive standards VDE 0160 1994 EN50178 1998 permanent earthing requires either i The cross section of the protective conductor should be at least 10mm copper Note this minimum cross section was determined with regard to mechanical strength ii Laying of a second conductor through separate terminals and electrically parallel to the protective conductor Earth conductor shall individually satisfy the requirements for a protective conductor Note this ensures the equipment is still protectively earthed if one conductor is damaged For normal installation the Type 4 series will require two individual incoming protective
248. o Chapter 3 for EMC Installation guidelines 620 Vector Drive HA463584 2 1 Pre Installation Planning TERMINATIONS UL Compression Lug Kit is available for the drives which provide a set of lugs suitable for the following ratings These lugs must be applied with the correct tooling as described in the Installation Instructions provided with each Lug Kit The following terminal kit is available for the connection of Power Cabling Supply Constant Quadratic Amp Part Voltage Torque Torque No 620 380 460 14389585 8 AWG 52263 1 380 460V 15kW L9 208 240V 5 5kW 208 240V 7 5kW 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Pre Installation Planning 2 17 SPEED DELAY PILOT HEALTH m HEALTH LED coaststop
249. o factory defaults 6 8 Diagnostics and Fault Finding 620 Vector Drive HA463584 The European Directives and the CE Mark ie Chapter 7 The European Directives and the CE Mark CEMEP Until recently each European drives manufacturer and importer has been interpreting the EMC directive and marking requirements differently This has led to considerable confusion and frustration in the market place To provide a unified approach the European machines and drives manufactures via their national trade associations have formed the European Committee of Manufacturers of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics termed CEMEP This committee has produced a document entitled Recommendations for Application of Power Drive Systems PDS European Council Directives CE Marking and Technical Standardisation which will be followed by all major European Drives manufacturer A copy is available from your local trade association or from your local Eurotherm Drives office EMC DIRECTIVE EMC Responsibility The subject of CE marking and EMC is explored in more detail in a separate Eurotherm Application manual entitled Installation Guidelines for modules and systems part number HA388879 available from your local Eurotherm Drives office The following sections are the minimum necessary for basic understanding Eurotherm Drives are adhering to the CEMEP recommendations on CE marking for EMC According to SI
250. oduct manual and will not be on the product label From 1997 when the mark for the Low Voltage Directive becomes mandatory the CE mark will appear on the product label but its validity for EMC can only be identified from the product manual The validity of the CE mark can be identified from the flowchart in figure 7 1 refer to SI No 2372 for clarification of relevant apparatus To assist manufacturers suppliers installers of relevant apparatus Eurotherms 620 Vector drive modules are EMC compliant to EN50081 1 1992 EN50082 1 1992 EN5008 1 2 1994 and prEN50082 2 1992 when fitted with the specified filter and installed according to these instructions as confirmed by the Manufacturers EMC declaration to be found at the end of this chapter Manufacturers suppliers installers of relevant apparatus CEMEP validity fields 3 amp 4 may use this compliance and manufacturers EMC declaration as a basis for their own justification of overall compliance with the EMC Directive It must be clearly understood by the customer before installation commences who is legally responsible for conformance with the EMC Directive Misappropriation of the CE mark is a criminal offence 620 Vector Drive HA463584 7 2 The European Directives and the CE Mark Figure 7 1 Eurotherm EMC CE Mark Validity Chart IS E D MODULE NO RELEVANT APPARATUS WITH INTRINSIC FUNCTION TO END USER CEMEP VALIDITY FIELD 1 CEMEP VALIDIT
251. of the load This is calculated as follows 0 0055 x total inertia kgm x initial RPM final RPM ramp down time Peak power dissipation in W or 0 0055 xJ x N tb Ppk where J total inertia in kgm N is the initial motor speed in RPM N is the final speed and t is the braking time in seconds The average power dissipation calculated as follows peak power in W x ramp down time Average power W cycle time in seconds Or Ppk tc Pay x tb where t is the cycle time in seconds refer to Figure 3 4 For example for a system with a total inertia of 1 kgm decelerating from 1500 RPM to 500 RPM in 10 seconds and a cycle time of 110 seconds the calculations are 0 0055 x 1x 1500 500 10 _ 0 0055 x 2250000 250000 10 _ 0 0055 x 2000000 7 10 _ 11000 107 1100W 1 1kW Peak for 10 Seconds Peak power W ak Average power W power x braking time in seconds cycle time in seconds _ 1100 110 100W The brake resistor must be rated to cope with both the peak and average power For the above example a resistor capable of dissipating 1100W peak for 10 seconds and an average power of 100W will be required x 10 Information on the peak power rating and the average power rating of resistors must be obtained from the resistor manufacturer Alternatively if this information is not available then a large safety m
252. olution is maintained by re addition of all remainders ensuring no information is lost SIGN O SIGN 1 Input 1 polarity The sign is displayed as NEG or POS with zero being negative and one being positive DIVIDER 0 DIVIDER 1 Input scaling Divisions by zero are trapped and the result is set to zero LIMIT The Setpoint Sum programmable limit is symmetrical and has the range 0 00 to 300 00 The limit is applied both to the intermediate results of the RATIO calculation and the total output x OOH 5 Limit 1 Figure 5 2 Setpoint Sum INPUT O INPUT 1 INPUT 2 Input values 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 24 Function Blocks REFERENCE ENCODER MMI ENTRIES fl REF ENCODER fles PHASE RESET 600 FALSE de aan ae POS CALC ENABLE 337 FALSE OFFSET MENU f dias tater te OFFSET 447 0 OFFSET SCALE 609 1 OFFSET TRIM 670 0 E TEST MODE ENABLE 652 FALSE f hae E OFFSET 1 653 500 ems OFFSET 2 654 1000 fijo ws PERIOD 655 1000 mSECS POSITION ERR 342 100 00 SATURATED 610 FALSE Peis bear v OVERFLOW 611 FALSE fl ws POSITION ERROR 338 0 INPUT SCALING FBK SCALE 498 10000 FBK SCALE 499 10000 REF SCALE 343 10000 REF SCA
253. on the nameplate if required This speed will be the 100 speed referred to elsewhere in the MMI Use the and buttons to set the MAX SPEED RPM parameter to the required figure Press It is important at this stage to set MAX SPEED RPM to the highest value that you are likely to be using This is because the autotune will only set up the magnetising current values up to this speed If at a later stage you wish to run the motor faster then it will be necessary to re run the autotune To avoid this inconvenience set up MAX SPEED RPM to a high value now and reduce it after autotune if required The maximum motor speed should not of course be exceeded 4 Press to select BASE FREQUENCY and then press Read the motor power supply frequency from the motor nameplate typically 50Hz or 60 Hz and use the and buttons to set the BASE FREQUENCY parameter to the same figure Press 5 Press to select MOTOR VOLTAGE and then press Read the motor power supply voltage from the motor nameplate and use the and buttons to set the MOTOR VOLTAGE parameter to the same figure Press 6 Press to select MOTOR RATING RMS and then press Read the motor full load current from the motor nameplate and use the and buttons to set the MOTOR RATING RMS parameter to the same figure Press 7 Press to select NO OF POLES and then press Read the number of poles from the motor nameplate This number must be divisible by 2 e g 2 4 6 8 etc or an err
254. ons adjust the value up and down The button steps up a level either from a parameter to a menu option or from a menu option to the next highest level menu The process of stepping through the menus and adjusting parameters is illustrated in Figure 4 2 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Setting up and Commissioning 4 5 READ ONLY PARAMETERS MAIN MENU e g DIAGNOSTICS OPTION MENU d OPTION PARAM A PARAM A as i u VALUE SEM Y ASA CAN OPTION MENU B w K 9 A PARAM B VALUE etc E lt gt PARAM B OPTION MENU D MENU D VALUE PARAM A etc ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS PARAM C PARAM C i etc SN VALUE 1 A VALUE 2 A etc Figure 4 2 Using the MMI 620 Vector Drive HA463584 4 6 Setting up and Commissioning Menu Structure The options available to the user from the main menu are given in Figure 4 3 These options are briefly described in the following par
255. operation of any earth fault monitoring equipment In addition the EMC performance of the filter will be degraded Eurotherm Drives do not recommend the use of AC supply filters on non earth referenced supplies As with all power electronic drives the conducted emissions increase with motor cable length EMC conformance to the stringent limits is only guaranteed up to a cable length of 50 m types 4 5 6 and 7 This length can be increased Refer to section entitled Motor Cable length Limitations in this chapter If one EMC filter is to be used in an enclosure then this filter should be mounted as close to the incoming AC supply to the enclosure as possible 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 2 2 Installation Procedure The recommended EMC filters are designed to work with supplies which are balanced with respect to earth i e earthed referenced supplies On some specific customer sites the supply may not be balanced with respect to earth The recommended standard EMC filters are not recommended be used on such supplies Refer to Eurotherm Drives for more information The EMC filters contain capacitors phase to phase and phase to earth Discharge resistors are fitted but the filters terminals and wiring must not be touched for a period of 5 minutes after the removal of the AC supply Not adhering to this warning can result in electric shock IMPORTANT WARNINGS The EMC filter must only be used with a permanent earth connection using one of th
256. or the application The minimum resistance of the combination should not be less than that specified in Table 3 2 The resistor s must be specified to the maximum DC link voltage 810V for the 400V build 420V for the 230V build 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 1 Brake Resistor Specification flying leads al F b E L3 L1 Figure 3 3 Mechanical outline of default brake resistors Part number CZ463068 CZ388396 srr Electrical Connection M5 spade Resistor Derating Graph 100 chassis mounted 80 tree air ofRated 60 40 20 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 Ambient Temp These resistor should be mounted on a heatsink back panel and covered to prevent injury from burning 620 Vector Drive HA463584 3 2 Installation Procedure Specification of the Dynamic Braking Switch Typical motor rating 380 460 Volts Typical motor rating 208 240 Volts mas SSCS T T piel trong 008 __ taw esa e 35 Table 3 2 Dynamic Braking Switch Ratings 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 3 Type 8 9 and 10 Brake Unit Rating The type 8 9 and 10 brake units have the following specification Maximum braking power 150 Operating voltage 750 820 V de Maximum duty cycle 30 Maximum on time 20 Secon
257. or the operation of the drive Diagnostics that can be monitored are described in the following paragraphs These diagnostics are read only TOTAL SPD DMD SPEED FB UNFIL SPEED FEEDBACK SPEED ERROR TORQUE DEMAND TORQUE FEEDBACK CURRENT FEEDBACK TERMINAL VOLTS DC LINK VOLTS TERM V INTEGRAL ACTUAL POS I LIM ACTUAL NEG I LIM INVERSE TIME AT CURRENT LIMIT AT ZERO SPEED AT ZERO SETPOINT AT STANDSTILL STALL TRIP RAMP ING DRIVE START DRIVE ENABLE OPERATING MODE HEALTHY HEALTH OUTPUT READY RUN CO PRO PRESENT Speed loop total setpoint after the ramp to zero block Raw speed feedback usually used for analogue outputs Speed loop feedback Speed loop error Current loop demand speed error PI output or external current demand clamped by all the current limits Scaled and filtered torque Scaled and filtered current Scaled motor output volts DC link volts Output out motor volts compensation loop Overall positive current limit value Overall negative current limit value Inverse time clamp output level Current demand is being restrained by the overall current limit At zero speed feedback At zero speed demand AT ZERO SPEED and ZERO SETPOINT Armature current is above STALL THRESHOLD and ZERO SPEED but not AT ZERO SETPOINT If the difference between the ramp input and the ramp output is greater than the RAMP THRESHOLD then RAMPING is TRUE Controller start ru
258. or will be generated later Use the and buttons to set the NO OF POLES parameter Press 8 Press to select NAMEPLATE RPM and then press Read the base speed from motor nameplate use the and buttons to set the NAMEPLATE RPM parameter to the specified figure Press It is important to enter this value exactly as it appears on the nameplate For example if it appears on the nameplate as 1450rpm DO NOT round it up to 1500rpm 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Setting up and Commissioning 4 9 9 Press to select CURRENT and then press Read the no load current from the motor nameplate and use the and buttons to set the MAG CURRENT 3 parameter to the specified figure No Load Current Motor Rating RMS 100 Press If the no load current is not available set the MAG CURRENT to 30 40 for motors less than 30kw and 20 30 for motors gt 30kw 10 Press to select ROTOR TIME CONST and then press This parameter sets up initial estimate of rotor time constant which Autotune will later optimise For motors up to 2 2kW use 100 0ms between 2 2kW and 7 5kW use 200 0ms between 7 5kw and 22kW use 400 0 and for larger motors use 800 0ms Use the and buttons to set the ROTOR TIME CONST parameter to the required figure Press 11 At this point almost all of the required basic parameters have been entered and further parameters can only be determined by running the drive All the
259. otor usually 50 or 60Hz Actual motor volts from motor nameplate or motor data sheet The motor rating current in amps from the motor nameplate For the best performance this value should be at least 50 of the drive rating If you are derating your motor for Inverter use then you should use the non derated value of current Number of poles in the motor must be divisible by two e g 2 4 6 8 Motor speed taking slip into account This value will be provided by the motor manufacturer usually on the motor nameplate 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 5 TORQUE LOOP BACKGROUND The current in an induction motor may be split into a torque producing component iq and a magnetising component id The vector drive will attempt to control both these components The magnetising current controls the flux in the motor When the motor turns this flux produces a back emf which is proportional to flux and rotor speed The voltage at the motor terminals will be approximately equal to this back emf plus a small stator voltage drop At light load i e when the motor is rotating with bare shaft only there is no torque component and the current flowing is entirely magnetising current If the motor flux is correct then the terminal volts at base speed should be approximately equal to the rated motor voltage This enables the magnetising current to be set up In practice the terminal volts should be about 95 of rated volts to all
260. ow for the extra stator voltage drop under load At light load the applied magnetising current will rotate synchronously with the motor shaft As the load increases the vector controller will cause the applied current to rotate slowly with respect to the motor shaft This is called slip This slip frequency will increase linearly as load is applied to the motor and may be typically of the order of 1Hz at rated load That is if the motor shaft is rotating at 50Hz then the motor current will be rotating at 51Hz This slip frequency is necessary to split the motor current into a magnetising component and a torque component The slip frequency is given by the value of the rotor time constant Itis important to get it correct in order to ensure the correct split of the motor current into the torque component and the magnetising component If the slip frequency is zero then 100 of the motor current goes to magnetise the rotor and none produces torque As the slip frequency is increased the proportion of magnetising current decreases Slip frequency is inversely proportional to rotor time constant The aim is to maintain constant magnetising current for all load conditions by linearly increasing the slip frequency as load increases If the slip frequency is increased too much as load is applied the magnetising current will be too small and the terminal voltage will drop If the slip frequency is increased by too little the magnetising current will be
261. ower face of the drive as shown in the drawing below The terminals are identified with the symbol IEC 417 Symbol 5019 and are intended to be used with protective conductors terminated with compression terminations sized to accept the M5 diameter bolt fitted and the conductor size selected The single incoming protective conductor shall be of 10mm cross sections minimum permanent earthing in Europe and be connected to the terminal marked as shown in the drawing below whilst the motor protective conductor shall be connected to the remaining earth terminal located on the lower face of the drive LC gt P E 7 Anu nm ON _ 325 NA E x s xl 2 ns wl INK QU LUN Z Motor Supply PE 2d 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 Direct Wall Mounted Models Model 620 Type 4 and Type 5 Series Protective earthing arrangements for wall mounted models are provided by two size M5 diameter terminals mounted on either side of the internal faces of the sideplates of the conduit gland box as shown in the accompanying drawing Both terminals are identified with the symbol IEC 417 Symbol 5019 and are intended to be used with protective conductors terminated with compression terminations siz
262. parameters should now be saved To save the parameters press which will select SAVE PARAMETERS option and then press Press to save the parameters The display will say FINISHED after a second or so when the process is complete Press to return to the Configure Drive menu Caution When power is removed from the product it must not be re applied for a period of 30 seconds to allow the inrush limit circuit to operate correctly Setup Step 5 Run the drive The next step is to run the drive Warning UNPREDICTABLE MOTION ESPECIALLY IF MOTOR PARAMETERS ARE INCORRECT ENSURE NO PERSONNEL IN THE VICINITY OF THE MOTOR OR ANY CONNECTED MACHINERY e ENSURE THAT THE EMERGENCY STOP CIRCUITS FUNCTION CORRECTLY BEFORE RUNNING THE MOTOR FOR THE FIRST TIME WHEN THE DRIVE IS RUN FOR THE FIRST TIME ROTATION WILL BE OF UNKNOWN DIRECTION MAY BE JERKY AND SPEED CONTROL MAY NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY e ENSURE THAT NO MACHINERY CONNECTED TO THE MOTOR WILL BE DAMAGED BY UNPREDICTABLE MOTION 1 Press to put the drive into LOCAL MODE The LOCAL LED should light 2 Usethe and buttons to set a speed demand of between 5 and 10 of full speed the actual value is not critical 3 Press to start the motor The RUN LED should illuminate If any error messages occur on the MMI refer to Chapter 6 Diagnostics 4 Listen to and look at the motion of the motor If the encoder sign is correct the motor will rotate smoothly and respond to
263. point star point near the PE or PEN terminal of the main supply Flexible large cross section cable to ensure a low HF impedance should be used The arrangement of the busbars should be such that the connection to the single earth point are as short as possible Fig 3 12 shows an implementation of a star point earthing policy To Motor To Motor To Motor Screened Screened PE protective earth Power Screen Earth OA analogue Ovolts OD digital Ovolts PLC AC DC Sig cntrl Screen PE Unscreened DNE pur n DET Signals ee Unscreened Signals me d 24V Control Digital Clean Earth Metal Work Earth Metal Incoming Safety Earth STAR POINT Doors Work Backplate 110V Control Fig 3 12 Implementation of star point earthing policy for multi drive installation 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Installation Procedure 3 2 5 Screening and Earthing When Wall Mounted To provide for good EMC performance the recommended EMC filter must be fitted and the cables between the wall mount 620 drive module and the motor screened or armoured Also screening of control and signal cables may be required Refer to the previous instructions on minimising radiated emission page 3 22 In addition any connections to the DC link must also be screened armoured with the screen connected at both ends e g to the protective earth of the dynamic brake resistor All 620 drive modules comply with the radi
264. r Energy flows back from the motor into the DC link capacitors within the drive This causes the DC link voltage to rise If the DC link voltage exceeds 810V for the 400V build or 420V for the 230V build then the drive will trip to protect the capacitors and the inverter power devices The amount of energy that can be absorbed in the capacitors is relatively small typically more than 20 braking torque will cause the drive to trip on overvoltage Dynamic braking increases the braking capability of the drive by dissipating the excess energy in a high power resistor connected across the DC link refer to Figure 3 2 EXTERNAL Eres Ry sane udis atr M pa neut RESISTOR NETWORK See figures 2 3 2 6 for GATE connection details DRIVE CIRCUIT DYNAMIC BRAKING OPTION Figure 3 2 The Dynamic Braking Option The dynamic braking option is a PCB with an extra IGBT power device fitted This is fitted inside the drive package and is connected to the negative side of the DC link as shown in Figure 3 2 When the DC link voltage rises above 750V for the 400V build 385 for the 230V build the brake unit switches the external resistor network across the DC link The brake unit switches off again when the DC link voltage falls below the threshold level The amount of energy produced by the motor during regeneration depends upon the RAMP DOW
265. r this procedure Should it ever be necessary to reset all the parameters to their factory defaults e g when swapping out a drive use the following procedure 620 Vector Drive HA463584 4 1 2 Setting up and Commissioning 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 9s Chapter 5 Function Blocks SET UP PARAMETERS INTRODUCTION This section provides reference information for the more advanced programming capabilities of the 620 Vector series controllers Each section describes a particular functional area and the associated menu options which are used to alter the parameters Where appropriate a functional block diagram illustrates the how the function operates Reference to the Functional Description and Microprocessor Block Diagram in Chapter 2 may be of assistance in understanding the relationship between these functional diagrams Each of the menu options refer to Figure 5 1 has an associated Tag number associated with it which provides a unique identification These tag numbers are shown within this section and also within Chapter 9 which holds a complete list of all tags with there ranges and defaults Tag numbers can also be seen by pressing the M key with FULL MENUS enabled Menu Title Text as it appears on MMI Tag Number TOES RAMPS RAMP ACCEL TIME Loe NOM OMSEES AUD MEAE RAMP DECEL TIME 55 10 0 SECS terre RAMP QUENCH 56 FALSE
266. rd System The SYSTEM option enables the user to set re configurable input and output control board connections Refer to SYSTEM for further details 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Setting up and Commissioning 4 7 SETTING UP PROCEDURE Warning ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD WAIT 3 MINUTES AFTER POWER IS DISCONNECTED BEFORE WORKING ON ANY PART OF THE SYSTEM OR REMOVING THE TERMINAL COVER FROM THE DRIVE Setup Step 1 Before You Start 1 Before power is applied to the system the following items should be checked 2 Mains power supply voltage is correct for the drive type 3 Motor is of correct voltage rating and is connected in either star or delta as appropriate 4 An encoder of the correct type is fitted to the motor properly with no plug A A and B are connected to the drive See Table 2 2 5 external wiring circuits such as Power connections Control connections Motor connections Earth connections are properly connected and secure 6 Check for damage to equipment Do not attempt to operate the equipment if damage is found 7 Check for loose ends clippings drilling swarf etc lodged in the drive or ancillary equipment Do not attempt to operate the equipment until any such foreign objects have been completely removed 8 If possible check that the motor can be turned freely and that the motor cooling fan is intact and free of obstructions Setup Step 2 Ensure The Safety Of The Complete System Next ensure the safe
267. res To get 100 Hardware Offset Modulu Figure 5 29 Analogue O P Block Diagram ANOUT 1 C5 AND ANOUT 2 F TO GET 10V Scalar value which produces 10 V output OFFSET Offset value added to the normal output value after the scalar and before the modulus CALIBRATION Output scalar MODULUS Unsigned analogue output enable SOURCE TAG N Source of output value ANOUTX Diagnostic after scaling block if source tag is non zero else it could be used as a destination tag HARDWARE OFFSET Offset value added to the final output value INPUTS BLOCK DIAGRAM Value For TRUE 1 Destination 2 Value For FALSE 1 Digital input Diagnostic Figure 5 30 Digital Input Block Diagram The Destination for a digital input can be any valid TAG this means that a digital input can be used to select one of two values for a given parameter It is also possible to treat the values for TRUE and FALSE as destination Tags from other functions or inputs 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 6 6 Function Blocks MMI ENTRIES DIGITAL INPUTS fif tds DIGIN 1 E2 fuisset VALUE FOR TRUE 279 0 01 fon eb VALUE FOR FALSE 280 0 00 uu OUTPUT 527 0 01 5 DESTINATION 281 57 ess DIGIN 2 VALUE FOR TRUE 283 0 01 T a VALUE FOR FALSE 284 0 00 fuilk Ua duals OUTPUT 528 0 00 5 DESTINATION TAG 285 92 Ef
268. riage to accelerate up to line speed A synchronisation signal is calculated from position error and used to fire the knife After the cut a number of counts equivalent to the length to be cut is subtracted from the position error This has the effect of re synchronising the knife drive with the next cut position External logic must be used to ensure that the timing is appropriate and position the knife for the next cut Limit A is the Home End of travel limit Between Limit A and The position Error must be clamped to gt 0 this has the effect that the carriage is brought to rest at the home point e B is the final End of travel stop NOTES e The signal is edge triggered The new position is applied through a linear ramp to reduce mechanical stresses to the machine e Anew cut signal can be triggered at any point two edges will cause 2 length to be subtracted LENGTH Is the number of counts to add or subtract from the position error on a positive transition of SUBTRACT LENGTH LENGTH SCALE A scale for LENGTH to allow for large indexes LENGTH RATE The rate at which length is subtracted from position error SUBTRACT LENGTH Each positive transition of SUBTRACT LENGTH causes Length to be subtracted from position error INCH INCH ADVANCE Boolean flag that when TRUE will trickle INCH RATE counts into the position Error each millisecond This can be used to align the master motor to the referen
269. rive HA463584 5 2 Function Blocks Internal links are used to route variables which do not have source tags or destination tags associated with them Source and destination tags are found in the menu Configure I O under System See Menu Structure in chapter 4 This menu contains sub menus Analogue Inputs Digital Inputs Analogue Outputs Digital Outputs Block Diagram and Internal Links Destination tags for analogue and digital inputs may be found under Analogue Inputs and Inputs Source tags for analogue and digital outputs may be found under Analogue Outputs and Digital Outputs Destination tags for function blocks may be found in Block Diagram A full description of the source and destination tags available is given in section Configure I O on page 5 45 The menu also contains the flag Configure Enable which must be set to true before any re configuring can be done See section Configure I O on page 5 45 EXAMPLE 1 Re route digital input 1 terminal E2 to the System Ramp External Reset It is normally connected to ramp hold by default See System Ramp diagram on page 5 3 This will cause the system ramp output to return to its reset value whenever a 1 is applied to digital input 1 1 Go into System menu then into Configure I O Select Configure Enable and set this flag to true Find Digital Inputs menu and select 1 E2 9 Go into this menu
270. rmal stop if USE SYSTEM RAMP is TRUE RAMP HOLD While TRUE the ramp output is held at its last value This is overridden by External Reset or Auto Reset RAMP INPUT Ramp Input TAG S RAMP Percentage of ramp with S shaped rate of change A value of zero is equivalent to a linear ramp Changing this value affects the ramp times See RAMP ACCEL DECEL TIME equation 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 4 Function Blocks Po S RAMP Figure 5 3 S Ramp RAMPING THRESH Ramping flag threshold level The threshold is used to detect whether the ramp is active shown by the ramping TAG if RAMP OUTPUT RAMP INPUT gt RAMPING THRESH RAMPING TRUE else RAMPING FALSE endif AUTO RESET If AUTO RESET is TRUE then the ramp is reset whenever SYSTEM RESET is TRUE that is each time the Speed Current loop is unquenched If the drive is restarted before the stop sequence has reached stop zero speed the System Ramp will not be reset If FALSE then the ramp is only reset by EXTERNAL RESET System Reset is an internal flag that is set TRUE for one cycle after the Speed Current loop is enabled i e every time the drive is started NOTE Reset overrides ramp hold EXTERNAL RESET If EXTERNAL RESET is TRUE then the ramp is held in reset EXTERNAL RESET does not depend on AUTO RESET for its operation Ramp Reset Definition Ramp Reset System Reset AND Auto Reset OR External Reset NOTE Reset overrides ramp hold RESET VALUE Th
271. s STALL TRIP 20 DRIVE START 23 is de DRIVE ENABLE 24 m OPERATING MODE 2 HEALTHY 27 HEALTH OUTPUT 12 READY 559 FAL RUN 28 FALSE Pise ANIN 1 C3 29 ANIN 3 F2 31 ANIN 4 32 ANIN 5 F4 33 ANOUT 1 C5 34 Saker ANOUT 2 F5 35 Vis stis COAST STOP 26 Meta t PROGRAM STOP 22 DIGIN B6 JOG 37 DIGIN B7 START 3 S eto DIGIN B8 ENABLE me DIGIN 1 E2 39 E3 40 E4 41 E5 521 rede DIGOUT 1 E6 42 usos DIGOUT 2 E7 43 S DIGOUT 3 E8 44 ne RAISE LOWER O P eile ty SPT SUM 1 46 5 SUM O P 2 38 SPT SUM 3 38 ET RAMP OUTPUT 47 we dads PRESET 110 m SPEED SETPOINT 4 SEQ RUN INPUT 49 P SEQ OUTPUT 50 PS ENCODER 51 PARAMETERS 2 DIGIN 3 4 RAMP ACCEL TIME DECEL TIME QUENCH 56 HOLD 57 d RAMP INPUT 58 S RAMP 59 THRESH sQ AUTO RESET 61 S ROS EXTERNAL RESET dde ditio do gd RESET VALUE 63 235 scs RAMPING 21 RAMP OUTPUT 47 OP STATION dedi SETPOINT 507 1 0 00 1 0 00 1 0 00 10 78 0 00 5 80 0 VOLTS 3 608 VOLTS 84 608 VOLTS 623 100 00 13 100 00 14 100 00 5 151 100 00 5 FALSE TRUE 18 TRUE TRUE n lI RAMPING 21 FALSE FALSE FALSE 5 STOPPED UE TR
272. s terminal must be connected to a permanent protective earth ground Motor earth connection This terminal may be used for the protective earth connection to the motor See Chapter 1 MECHANICAL DETAILS for tightening torque GRD Esel GRD O Figure 2 10 620 5 Power Terminals 620 Vector Drive HA463584 2 4 Pre Installation Planning 620 Type 6 Table 2 6 620 TYPE 6 Power Terminals Terminal Terminal Description M1 U M2 V M3 W Power outputs forming the 3 phase supply connection for the motor D Power input output This terminal is used in conjunction with the DC terminal when two or more controllers are coupled together It carries a negative DC link voltage D C Power input output This terminal is used for connection to a braking resistor It is also used in conjunction with the DC terminal when two or more controllers are coupled together It carries a positive DC link voltage typically 600V referred to terminal DC Power input output for the connection of a dynamic braking resistor Refer to DYNAMIC BRAKING for further details This terminal is connected to the negative side of the link capacitor when the brake option is not fitted Power inputs These terminals are the 3 phase mains supply input 380 460V 10 or 208 240V 10 AC line to line Power earth This terminal must be connected to a permanent protective earth ground Motor earth
273. s via the MMI Running Autotune to set up magnetising current and slip Tuning the speed loop for the particular application Initial Setup When the 620 Vector drive is switched on the HEALTH LED should light The remaining 3 LEDs should be off and the power up message should appear on the MMI display as follows 620 VECTOR DRIVE TYPE X CHASSIS 1 Press The display will show MENU LEVEL DIAGNOSTICS Pressing the and buttons will enable you to move around the top level menu Press until the display shows CONFIGURE DRIVE if you miss CONFIGURE DRIVE or any other menu item either use the button to get back or keep pressing until CONFIGURE DRIVE is displayed again You will be navigating the Initial Setup menus shown at the extreme left of Fig 4 3 2 Ensure that the CONFIGURE DRIVE menu is selected on the display Press to enter this menu When you enter the menu the first parameter to appear on the display will be ENCODER LINES Other parameters may be selected by means of the and buttons Locate ENCODER LINES and press to select this parameter Use the and buttons to enter the number of lines on the encoder When you have entered the correct number of encoder lines press to return to the previous level where the remaining parameters may be accessed 3 Press to select MAX SPEED RPM and then press This entry sets the maximum rotation speed for the process and can be up to 9 times the motor base speed printed
274. sets the length of the minimum pulse required INPUT C inverts the output when TRUE The duration of the pulse is at least the period set by INPUT B or any multiple thereof up to a maximum of 3000 seconds i OFF time I I ON time input_b Creates a pulsed TRUE FALSE output of programmable frequency INPUT A enables the pulse train when TRUE disables when FALSE INPUT B sets the length of the on part of the pulse INPUT C sets the length of the off part of the pulse 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 4 Operation Description WINDOW input C window widt ee input B threshold input C ve input C ve This function outputs TRUE when INPUT A is w and FALSE otherwise INPUT B sets the threshold of the window to be monitored INPUT C defines the range of the window around the threshold i e if INPUT 5 and INPUT C 4 then the range is 3 to 7 If INPUT C is set to zero the output will only be TRUE if INPUT A is exactly equal to INPUT B this is fulfilled in the default condition when inputs A B amp C are all zero If INPUT C is set to a negative value its absolute value defines the window range and the output is inverted UP DOWN COUNTER INPUT A provides a rising edge trigger to increment the output count by one INPUT B provides a rising edge trigger to decrement the output count by one INPUT C holds the output at zero
275. sks have been successfully completed does the 620 send the ACK response to the computer This signifies that the message was correctly received and implemented 2 Negative acknowledgement NAK If the message fails any of the above checks the 620 sends NAK response to the computer This signifies that the message received by the 620 contained an error and accordingly it has not updated the selected parameter One possible reason is the incorrect calculation of BCC At this point the selected command may be repeated by sending the data transfer string without re establishing connection until the computer receives the ACK response 3 No Reply Under certain circumstances the computer may not receive a response from the 620 This could be due to any of the following reasons 6 Data out of range returns NAK and is discarded 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 56 d Blocks Unit address identifiers not recognised b An error e g parity is found in one or more of the characters up to and including BCC c Communications loop failure perhaps due to noise or wrong baud rate selected d Hardware failure In these cases the computer should be programmed to time out i e wait for a response for a short time 160ms minimum before trying again The sequence diagram for the data send function is given in Figure 5 25 Termination The termination procedure is used if the computer wishes to stop selecting a particular 620 and e
276. ss the installation specifically prevents unexpected or unsequenced energisation of the motor In all situations the user should provide sufficient guarding to prevent risk of injury and or additional redundant monitoring and safety systems NOTE During power loss the product will not operate as specified MAINTENANCE Maintenance and repair should only be performed by competent persons using only the recommended spares or return to factory for repair Use of unapproved parts may create a hazard and risk of injury A WHEN REPLACING A PRODUCT IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ALL USER DEFINED PARAMETERS THAT DEFINE THE PRODUCT S OPERATION ARE CORRECTLY INSTALLED BEFORE RETURNING TO USE FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CREATE A HAZARD AND RISK OF INJURY PACKAGING The packaging is combustible and if disposed of in this manner incorrectly may lead to the generation of toxic fumes which are lethal WEIGHT Consideration should be given to the weight of the product when handling REPAIRS Repair reports can only be given if sufficient and accurate defect reporting is made by the user Remember the product without the required precautions can represent an electrical hazard and risk of injury and that rotating machinery is a mechanical hazard and risk of injury PROTECTIVE INSULATION 1 All exposed metal insulation is protected by basic insulation and bonding to earth i e Class 1 2 NOTE Earth bonding is the responsibility of the installer 3 All sign
277. stablish connection with another This is achieved by sending the establish connection sequence The computer retains Master status and transmits an EOT character to reset all instruments on the data link to be responsive to the next GID UID address parameter PROTOCOL ESTABLISH MESSAGE TRANSFER TERMINATION PROCEDURE CONNECTION PHASE A PHASE B SENDER SUPERVISORY SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE m gt gt x R 0 ENTRY app REE LY E i VALID E T ENTRY iy Y K INVALID Figure 5 25 Sending Data to the 620 5703 SUPPORT MMI ENTRIES SERIAL LINKS due RO PORT P3 focii 5703 SUPPORT foe SETPT RATIO 233 1 0000 fon INVERT SETPOINT 234 FALSE fixe SCALED INPUT 235 0 00 RAW INPUT 584 0 00 5 Posse OUTPUT 236 0 00 5703 SUPPORT This unit provides the facility to run a line of drives in speed lock without the use of a 5720 Quadraloc controller for accurate speed holding encoder feedback is required Ratioed speed locking is supported although the unit is not intended to supplant Quadraloc in applications requiring high accuracy A 16 bit signal is passed between drives through a fibre optic link and the P3 port on each 620 drive Th
278. t e aet e eed eux nae 1 3 Electrical Ratings Power 1 4 Electrical Ratings Control Circuit asss 1 5 SUDpli8Ss tito oe Peu D 1 5 Analogue iiti tte tet terere ee reete va dire ree vaa dae 1 5 E 1 5 Digital 1 5 5 1 6 Encoder gt 1 6 Encoder Supply u m u u 1 6 1 6 Mechanical 1 7 620 TYPE A 1 7 O20 1 7 520 TYPE e 1 8 520 YPE 7 Sos aah 1 8 ENCLOSURE x nte o t e ete haqa hana haqtaman 1 8 EMC Speciticathio Mess 1 8 HGA POWER 1 9 Special Considerations For Installations Requiring Compliance with UL 1 10 Environmental Requirements essen 1 11 Product Code eL LI ete tt M RR RR RR 1 11 Example Codes anam a ma et LT 1 13 Cont 7 Contents Contents Page Chapter 2 PRE INSTALLATION PLANNING INTRODUCTION SS AS ANAS Sn Sn ete t nette heit anita hada tania 2 1 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW 2 1 Co
279. t CR gt Table 5 3 5703 Telegram The percent character This is the message start character Checksum the sum of The Low and High data bytes lt CR gt Carriage return character This is the message end character If any errors occur during transmission the message is discarded by the receiver alarm is generated by the receiver slave if too many consecutive errors or time outs occur At 19200 Baud the approximate maximum transmission rate 15 message every cycle of the block diagram This is the maximum transmission rate SERIAL LINK PORT P3 LEAD Caution There is 24V On Pin 2 of the P3 Port This may damage your PC or the 620 if connected to the serial port Figure 5 27 P3 Port P3 Port P3 Signal Female DB9 Female DB25 1 Ov 5 7 24 RX TX Table 5 4 Lead pin allocation 620 Vector Drive HA463584 DISPLAY STATION D P M For information only NEWPORT 6155AS REVISION B ONWARDS Function Blocks 5 5 9 More information on the Newport 6 Digit serial input remote display is available from USA Germany Newport Electronics Inc Newport Electronics GmbH Phone 714 540 4914 Phone 07056 3017 Fax 714 546 3022 Fax 07056 8540 Benelux NL UK Newport Electronics B V Newport Electronics U K Phone 020 6418405 Phone 01455 285998 Fax 020 6434643 Fax 01455 285604 ASCII hex Keyboard Character France Newport Electronics S A R L Phone 1 30 62 14 00 Fax 1 30 69
280. t earthing strategy should be followed for a single drive module mounted in an enclosure as shown in figure 3 11 The protective earth connection PE to the motor must run inside the screened cable between the motor and 620 drive module where it is to be connected to the motor protective earth terminal on the drive module Note in accordance with EN60204 only one protective earth conductor is permitted at each earth terminal contacting point Local wiring regulations may require the protective earth connection of the motor to be connected locally but this will not cause shielding problems due to the relatively high RF impedance of the local earth connection AC Motor Motor Cable Screen Supply Filter 777 As short as possible Fig 3 11 Screening and earthing of a single 620 drive module When more than one piece of electrical equipment is fitted inside an enclosure care must be taken to ensure that noise flowing in the earth connection does not couple into other equipment A star point earthing policy separating noisy from quiet earths is strongly recommended Five separate earths branches should be provided for Clean earth busbar The Clean earth busbar is used as a reference point for all signal and control cabling This may the further subdivided into an analogue and a digital reference busbar each separately connected to the star earthing point The digital reference is also used for any 24V control
281. t the drive in remote mode the following parameters must be TRUE REM SEQ ENABLE 791 AND REMOTE 786 BIT 0 DRIVE JOG To Jog the drive in remote mode the following parameters must be TRUE REM SEQ ENABLE 791 AND REMOTE 786 BIT 3 JOG MODE To select the jog setpoint in remote mode the following parameters must be TRUE REM SEQ ENABLE 791 AND REMOTE 786 BIT 4 ACK ALARM To Acknowledge and alarm both the following parameters must be TRUE ACK ALARM 166 AND R 786 BIT 8 NOTE if remote sequencing is not enable then RE MOTE 786 BIT 1 lu gt 0203 lu gt 0201 lu gt 0200 lu gt 0205 lu gt 020C lu gt 0000 lu gt 0300 Healthy Output Bit 11 lu gt 0200 REMOTE SEQ 786 0 SE Q REM SEQ ENABLE 791 Drive Start 23 REMOTE SEQ 786 1 SE Q SE REMOTE TRIP ALARM The Remote trip alarm is designed to signal a network fault to the drive When using the 6204 Profibus interface all outputs are set to zero on link fail If one of the outputs is REMOTE SEQ 786 the drive will trip after a delay specified by Remote Delay The Drive will then need a low gt High transition on Ack Alarm and Start before the drive may run again Remote Inhibit 788 Disable remote trip JOG MMI ENTRIES REM SEQ ENABLE 791 gt Aq Drive Jog REMOTE SEQ 786 2
282. ter than or equal to INPUT B otherwise the OUTPUT is FALSE INPUT B ABS A CIRFUTA J The OUTPUT is TRUE if the 90801 magnitude of INPUT A is greater than or equal to the magnitude of INPUT INPUT C The OUTPUT is FALSE if the magnitude of INPUT A is less than the magnitude of INPUT B INPUT C Otherwise the OUTPUT is unchanged In this way the block acts as a magnitude comparator with a comparison level of INPUT B and a hysteresis band equal to INPUT C The OUTPUT is TRUE if the magnitude of INPUT A is greater than or equal to the magnitude of INPUT B otherwise the OUTPUT is FALSE ABS A gt INPUT gt ABS B 3 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Operation 1 IF C HOLD BINARY DECODE ON DELAY OFF DELAY 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 3 9 Description The OUTPUT is set to INPUT INPUT INPUT 100 00 If INPUT C is zero the OUTPUT is set to INPUT A otherwise the OUTPUT is unchanged On powering up the drive the output will be pre loaded with the last saved value of input B The OUTPUT is set according to which of the INPUTs are non zero INPUT C INPUTB INPUTA OUTPUT 0 0 00 0 0 01 0 0 02 0 0 03 0 0 04 0 0 05 0 0 06 0 0 07 In the above table 40 indicates that the corresponding input is not zero input C FALSE input C TRUE
283. the square root profile leads to a linear deceleration where as linear profile will give as 5 shaped deceleration It is intended that homing is used to bring the motor to reset from a low speed 10 over a relatively small distance 1 revolution MMI ENTRIES fos sa HOME area HOME 397 FALSE HOMING DISTANCE 396 2048 1 ENCODER SCALE 398 4 00 LINEAR 388 FALSE PE OVERSHOOT LIMIT 773 1 00 394 0 00 HOME OUTPUT 395 0 00 BLOCK DIAGRAM Speed Demand is the input to the speed loop Position Error is the distance in encoder pluses between the current position and Target position The homing distance is the stopping distance in encoder pulses PositionE SpeedDemand x ae SRampOutput HomingDistance NOTES POSSIBLE HOMING ERRORS Motor 100 Speed 1500 RPM 5000 line encoder Gearbox 18 1 2 5m s Pulley 650mm diameter 2 5 m s revolution 110 mm Internally the encoder is multiplied by 4 so 1 rev 20 000 counts Relationship between encoder counts and travel in mm on the lift car 2 5 m s 1 count 0 0055mm 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 5 How far does the car travel between the detection of the homing sensor and the drive seeing the command It will be assumed that the drive will be travelling relatively slowly when it receives the home command 1 5Hz
284. tination N of scaled analogue input value SCALED INPUT Diagnostic Block Diagram ANIN Diagnostic Terminal Volts ANIN 2 C4 Analogue Input 2 terminal A3 is not re configurable The calibration for this channel is found in SETUP PARAMETERS SPEED LOOP 5 2 Analogue input 2 is a direct input into the speed loop current loop and it is scanned synchronously with the current loop typically every 1 1 mSecs rather than every micro cycle time Therefore it should be used for any signal whose response is critical e g a trim input from microloc cut to length applications etc ALOGUE OUTPUTS MMI ENTRIES ANALOG OUTPUTS ANOUT 1 C5 GET 10V 272 100 00 5 Pe ears Gi OFFSET 332 0 00 HARDWARE OFFSET 676 0 00 5 us CALIBRATION 330 100 00 fold MODULUS 335 FALSE fud vus ANOUT 1 354 0 00 Eu sd pande SOURCE TAG 273 7 ficca Ws ANOUT 1 C5 34 0 000 VOLTS foc ne ANOUT 2 F5 fuyu TO 10V 275 150 00 5 s AEE OFFSET 333 0 00 5 HARDWARE OFFSET 677 0 00 5 CALIBRATION 331 100 00 5 MODULUS 336 FALSE h STI ANOUT 2 355 0 00 5 f uE Saud SOURCE TAG 276 9 fs Edge ANOUT 2 F5 35 0 000 VOLTS 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Function Blocks 5 65 DIAGNOST ANOU BLOCK DIAGRAM Offset Calibration Source Add
285. tion apertures provided within the glandbox Environmental Requirements The environmental limits for the 620 Vector series controllers are shown in Table 1 18 Humidity max 85 relative humidity non condensing at 40 C maximum 5000m Non flammable non corrosive and dust free Pollution Degree 2 Operating temperature range 0 C to 50 C 0 C to 40 C UL 1 option fitted Table 1 18 620 Series environmental requirements Product Code All 620 units are fully identified using an eleven block alphanumeric code as shown in figure 1 2 This code details the drive calibration and settings on despatch from the factory The product code appears as the Model on the rating label at the side of the unit Example Code 620STD 0750 400 0010 UK ENW 0000 000 B1 000 000 Block Number 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Figure 1 2 Product code blocks Details of each block of the product code are given in Table 1 19 2 620STD 620 Vector Standard 620COM 620 Vector Communications 620L 620 Vector Link 620ADV 620 Advance Drive not available for new designs Four numbers specifying the power rating in kW 0 75 1 1 kW 1 5 kw 2 2 kW 4 0 kW 5 5 kW 7 5 kW 11 kw 15 kw 18 kW 22 kw 30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 380 460 only 55 kW 380 460V only 75 kW 380 460V only 620 Vector Drive HA463584 1 s 2 Product Overview 3 Three numbers specifying the nominal input voltage rating 208 to 240V 10 50
286. to determine operating or fault conditions Refer to Chapter 6 for further information and descriptions of the diagnostics 620 Vector Drive HA463584 2 2 Pre Installation Planning Speed Feedback Ref Protective Earth Control Inputs Output Control Circuits amp Software Motor SIS 2 3 Phase Inverter Drive Supply Rectifier Circuits Outputs Internal DC Link choke Brake resistor This connection is made when the braking option is not fitted Dynamic Brake Circuit DBR Q Figure 2 1 Type 4 Simplified Block Diagram Motor 22 3 Phase Inverter Supply Rectifier Circuits Outputs Internal DC Link choke Protective Earth S Brake Dynamic resistor Brake Circuit Figure 2 2 Type 5 Simplified Block Diagram 620 Vector Drive HA463584 Pre Installation Planning 2 3 Motor ee 3 Phas Inverter Drive Supply Rectifier Circuits Outputs Internal DC Link choke Brake Dynamic resistor Brake Circuit Protective Earth S This connection is made when the braking option is not fitted Figure 2 3 Type 6 Simplified Block Diagram Motor 3 Phas M Inverter Drive Supply Rectifier Circuits Outputs Internal DC Link choke Protective Earth Dynamic resistor Brake Circuit Figure 2 4 Type 7 Simplified Block Diagram 620 Vector Drive HA463584 2 4 Pre Inst
287. too large and the terminal voltage will increase This enables the rotor time constant to be set up After setting up the magnetising current as above with no load on the motor the motor is then fully loaded and the value of rotor time constant is adjusted to give the correct slip frequency to give the correct motor terminal volts Alternatively it is possible to calculate the value of rotor time constant which will give the slip frequency written on the motor nameplate This is less accurate but it doesn t require a load rig Increasing rotor time constant Decreases slip frequency Increases motor terminal volts Decreasing rotor time constant Increases slip frequency Decreases motor terminal volts MAG CURRENT CALCULATION If an Autotune can not be performed then an approximation of Magnetising current can be found from either the motor no load current It may be calculated from No Load Current Motor Rating RMS 10096 or using the motors power factor cos and the table below MAG CURRENT 80 76 71 Magnetisation Current Full load Current 0 1 cos 66 60 53 44 39 Figure 5 12 MMI ENTRIES at TORQUE LOOP T MAG CURRENT 453 30 00 ROTOR TIME CONST 458 100 0 mSECS Pa u Eus TORQ DMD ISOLATE 596 FALSE ee AUX TORQUE DMD 599 0 00 C ADVANCED Ese REX s s 1 GAIN 149 70 ROTOR TEMP 769 100 00 5 Tr COMP COLD 770 80 00 5 DM Tr COMP 784
288. ty of the complete system when the drive is energised In particular ensure 1 That personnel are at risk of injury or inconvenience when the drive system is energised 2 That rotation of the motor in either direction will not cause damage 3 Thatother equipment will not be adversely affected by powering up Caution Before carrying out any high voltage insulation resistance checks with a Megger or similar device or performing point to point checking with a buzzer it is essential to completely disconnect the 620 Vector drive Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and or misleading results Setup Step 3 Prepare To Energise Prepare to energise the drive and system as follows Prevent application of the main power supply by removal of the supply fuses or isolate via supply circuit breaker 2 Disconnect the load from the motor shaft if possible 3 of the drive control terminals are not being used then refer to Chapter 2 Table 2 5 to check whether these unused terminals need to be tied high or low 4 Check the external run contacts are open 5 Check the external speed setpoint controls are all set to zero 620 Vector Drive HA463584 4 8 Setting up and Commissioning Setup Step 4 Power Once all the preceding steps are completed and understood the supply fuses or circuit breaker may be replaced and power applied to the drive Setting up the drive consists of Setting up basic motor parameter
289. uits IEC801 5 IEC1000 4 5 Voltage surges e g on local lightning strikes Immunity 50082 1 1992 see below for referenced standards see below Industrial installation with a separate transformer station RF emission 55011 Class A 50081 2 1994 EMC measures do not have to be implemented If interference in a neighbouring installation occurs the operator is responsible for taking measures to prevent interference In this case the required emission levels must be adhered to at the point of supply to the effected neighbouring installation Immunity 50082 2 1992 see below for referenced standards see below Fig 7 2 EMC Emission and Immunity Standards applicable to 620 Vector drive modules and similar equipment 620 Vector Drive HA463584 7 4 The European Directives and Mark When using the generic EMC standards the Residential commercial and light industry emission limits Class B are more stringent than the Industrial class A limits and so equipment which meets EN5008 1 1 1992 automatically meets EN50081 2 1994 Similarly the Industrial immunity requirements are more stringent than the Residential commercial and light industry requirements and equipment which meets prEN50082 2 1992 automatically meets 50082 1 1992 More and more Product Specific standards are being released with less onerous EMC requirements than the Ge
290. unction leaving the time constants unaffected A value of P 10 0 5 3 0 Function Blocks INT TIME CONST Ti DERIVATIVE Td FILTER TC Tf POSITIVE LIMIT NEGATIVE LIMIT O P SCALAR TRIM USER INTERFACE CONFIGURING THE PID FUNCTION INPUT CONNECTIONS means that for an error of 5 the proportional part initial step of the PID output will be 10 1 Td Ti 5 approx 50 for lt lt Ti This is the integrator time constant This is the differentiation time constant When Td 0 the transfer function of the block becomes a P In order to attenuate high frequency noise a first order filter is added in conjunction with the differentiation The ratio k of the Derivative Time Constant Td over the Filter Time Constant Tf typically 4 or 5 determines the high frequency lift of the transfer function For Tf 0 this filter is eliminated This is the upper limit of the PID algorithm This is the lower limit of the PID algorithm This is the ratio which the limited PID output is multiplied by in order to give the final PID Output Normally this ratio would be between 0 and 1 The two PID inputs Input 1 amp Input 2 by default are not connected to any signals and are only adjustable via the MMI up down arrow keys If the application requires setpoint and or feedback coming from other sources then these signals should be configured to point to Inputs 1 and Input 2 respectively OUTPUT CONN
291. ure 5 14 Symmetric Limits Asymmetric Limits Pos Torque Lim Main Torque Lim Neg Torque Lim Speed Loop O P Torque Demand Aux Torque Demand Figure 5 15 Asymmetric Limits Algorithm Clamp POS Limit if NEG POS if POS gt 0 gt NEG Limit POS clamp is NEG POS else if NEG NEG clamp is positive so clamp NEG clamp to POS 0 negative so clamp POS clamp to NEG POS NEG else Clamps have crossed over so set to zero NEG POS 0 endif endif CURRENT LIMIT Current Limit in Motor Amps taking into account both the magnetisation and torque components 14 and id CURRENT FEEDBACK This is normally a percentage of the rated motor current However if the rated motor current is greater than the rated drive current it is displayed as a percentage of drive current TERMINAL VOLTS Diagnostic DC LINK VOLTS Diagnostic DC VOLTS UNFLT An unfiltered version of DC Link volts TORQUE DEMAND Diagnostic TORQUE FEEDBACK Diagnostic 620 Vector Drive HA463584 5 8 Function Blocks SPEED LOOP MMI ENTRIES SPEED LOOP i ee E SPD PROP GAIN 161 10 00 abes SPD INT TIME 162 100 mSECS i INT DEFEAT 163 FALSE EEN ENCODER SIGN 164 NEG s gw ADVANCED OE SPEED FBK FILTER 673 0 500 f oo N SPEED DMD FILTER 662 0 750 a quy ADAPTIVE THRESH 674 0 50 ADAP
292. used to determine the health or operational mode of the drive Diagnostics are Read Only Local Mode A special operational mode of the drive where basic operations are controlled directly from the front panel MMI rather than by reference to external inputs The opposite to this is Remote 620 Vector Drive HA463584 4 2 Setting up and Commissioning Operator station Parameter Setpoint Parameter Save Function Keys The MMI when it is being used in LOCAL MODE to control the motor speed setpoint directly Can Also be used to describe the MMI and command buttons as a whole Any variable user input number such as RAMP ACCEL TIME etc Parameter names are shown in this chapter LIKE THIS They are usually shown with their associated menu trail i e how you get to them from the top level such as DIAGNOSTICS SPEED FEEDBACK where the double colon indicates a progression through one menu level A complete menu map the appendix The speed at which a motor is set to run at expressed as a percentage of the maximum speed which is programmed for the set up The PARAMETER SAVE option enables the user to store the setup parameters after adjustment Unless the user carries out this operation the entered settings will be lost if the power is removed from the Drive The four function keys allow the user to move around the menu structure on the display alter parameters or manually control the drive Each key is identif
293. y result in personal injury and or equipment damage Never work on any control equipment without first isolating all power supplies from the equipment The drive motor must be connected to an appropriate safety earth Failure to do so presents an electrical shock hazard This equipment contains high value capacitors Allow five minutes for capacitors to discharge prior to removing equipment covers Failure to do so presents an electric shock hazard Caution This equipment was tested before it left our factory However before installation and start up inspect all equipment for transit damage loose parts packing materials etc This product conforms to IP20 protection Due consideration should be given to environmental conditions of installation for safe and reliable operation Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the wiring without first disconnecting the product from the circuit being tested Static Sensitive This equipment contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts Observe static control precautions when handling installing and servicing this product THESE WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS ARE INCLUDED TO ENABLE THE USER TO OBTAIN THE MAXIMUM EFFECTIVENESS AND TO ALERT THE USER TO SAFETY ISSUES APPLICATION AREA Industrial non consumer Motor speed control utilising AC induction or synchronous motors PRODUCT MANUAL This manual is intended to provide a description of how the product works It is not inte

620 Product Manua

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents